JP2012143603A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having a reduced program volume required for executing variation display on two variation display devices.SOLUTION: First variation pattern-selecting processing for selecting a variation pattern including a variation display time from a variation display starting time to a variation display terminating time of first variation display on a first variation display device satisfying first starting conditions, and second variation pattern-selecting processing for selecting a variation pattern including a variation display time from a variation display staring time to a variation display terminating time of second variation display on a second variation display device satisfying second starting conditions, are executed by the same processing routine. The variation pattern including the variation display time of variation display is selected from a plurality of variation patterns to be displayed on any of the first and second variation display devices which satisfies the variation display starting conditions of the variation display.

Description

  According to the present invention, after the game ball has won the first starting area, the first start condition that enables the start of the variable display based on the winning is established, so that each can be identified. First variation display means for starting the first variation display by the identification information and deriving and displaying the display result, and after the game ball has won the second starting area, the variation display based on the winning can be started. And a second variation display means for starting the second variation display based on the second identification information that can be identified and deriving and displaying the display result based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means or the second variation display means.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result, the gaming state (game) The state of the machine, more specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled) is configured to give a predetermined game value to the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) are continuously stopped for a predetermined time, and are stopped, swung, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Hei 08-084807 (paragraph 0066) Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-312813 (paragraphs 0070, 0076, 0110, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, FIG. 16)

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of compressing a program capacity required for executing variable display by two variable display means.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, after the game ball has won a prize in the first starting area (for example, winning in the first starting prize opening 13), the first start condition that enables the start of variable display based on the winning is made possible. Based on the fact that the first special symbol variation start order has been established, the first variation display is started by the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) that can be identified, and the display result Based on the first variation display means for deriving and displaying (for example, the first special symbol display device 8a) and the game ball won in the second starting area (for example, winning in the second starting winning port 14). The second identification information (for example, the second identification information) that can be identified based on the fact that the second start condition (that the variation start order of the second special symbol has been reached) that enables the variation display to be started is established. The second variation display by special symbol) is started and the display result is derived and displayed. Second variation display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b), and a specific display result (for example, jackpot display result) predetermined in the first variation display means or the second variation display means is derived and displayed. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the game is played, and controls the progress of the game, and the first variation display means and the second Game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the change display in the change display means, and effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the effect parts provided in the gaming machine The effect component starts the variable display of the effect identification information (for example, the effect symbol) in response to the start of the first or second variable display, and the first variable display hand Alternatively, an effect display device (for example, the effect display device 9) that derives and displays the display result of the effect identification information in accordance with the derivation display of the display result of the second change display means, the game control means includes the first change display and the first change display. When the first start condition is satisfied (N in S211 in FIG. 19), on the condition that none of the two fluctuation displays is executed, the first fluctuation display by the first fluctuation display means is started. On the condition that the first variation display start means (game control microcomputer 560, S104 in FIG. 36) and neither the first variation display nor the second variation display are executed, the second start condition Is established (Y in S211 in FIG. 19), the second variation display start means (game control microcomputer 560, S104 in FIG. 36) for starting the second variation display by the second variation display means, 1 A first variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern including a variation display time from a variation display start time to a variation display end time of the first variation display in the first variation display means in which the start condition is satisfied; A second variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern including a variation display time from the start of variation display of the second variation display to the end of variation display in the second variation display means in which the second start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display means executed by the same processing routine (S91 to S101E) and satisfying the start condition of the fluctuation display among the first fluctuation display means and the second fluctuation display means. Is selected from a plurality of variation patterns (variation patterns in FIGS. 9 and 10) (microcomputer 560 for game control, FIG. 35). S91 to S101E) and the first variable display time of the variable display executed by the first variable display means when the first start condition is satisfied based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means. The data and the second data indicating the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display executed by the second fluctuation display means when the second start condition is satisfied are stored in the same storage area (the fluctuation display time timer provided in the RAM 55). Storage area (data storage area) (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, fluctuation time timer, S105 in FIG. 36), and when the fluctuation display is started, the first fluctuation display means and the first fluctuation display means Select from the fluctuation display means specifying command and fluctuation pattern selection means that can specify which of the two fluctuation display means to start fluctuation display. A variation start command transmitting means (game control microcomputer 560, S102 in FIG. 36) for transmitting a variation pattern command that can identify the specified variation pattern, and the effect control means transmits the variation start command transmission Based on the variation display means specifying command transmitted by the means, in the effect display device, the effect identification information corresponding to the first variation display means or the second variation display means specified by the variation display means specification command Effect display control means (for example, a portion of step S705 in the effect control microcomputer 100) that executes the change display, and the change pattern is displayed after the change display of the effect identification information is started in the effect display device. Temporarily stop the special display result until the display result is derived and displayed. And a re-variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous variation) for performing re-variation display for executing the variation display of the effect identification information again after a predetermined number of times. According to such a configuration, it is possible to compress the program capacity required for executing the variable display by the two variable display means.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 38E illustrates an effect control command signal line. It is a timing diagram showing the relationship between an 8-bit control signal and an INT signal constituting a control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transmission timing of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance specific area | region and a preservation | save area | region. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the common pending | holding memory number buffer with which a 1st pending memory number and a 2nd pending memory number are provided in common. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display area of the liquid crystal screen in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the frequency | count of the fluctuation | variation which can continue a time-short state, and the information (remaining frequency | count) which can specify the total frequency | count. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the frequency | count of the fluctuation | variation which can continue a time-short state, and the information (execution frequency) which can specify the total frequency | count. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display when a short time state is extended based on a specific super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display when a short time state is extended based on a specific notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the information which can specify the total frequency | count in a frequency display area. It is explanatory drawing which shows another modification of the information which can specify the total frequency | count in a frequency display area. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number updated on the production control board side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a promotion production execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a sub notice pattern classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a sub notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a sub notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a sub notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a control pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display state of a total pending storage display area. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the main notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the main notice setting process (modification). It is a flowchart which shows a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows reach production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows reach production setting processing (modification). It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st decoration symbol display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the situation of the display effect in an effect display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding memory | storage display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding memory | storage display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding memory | storage display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data set to a total pending | holding storage table, and the example of a display of a total pending | holding storage display area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data set to a total pending | holding storage table, and the example of a display of a total pending | holding storage display area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data set to a total pending | holding storage table, and the example of a display of a total pending | holding storage display area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data set to a total pending | holding storage table, and the example of a display of a total pending | holding storage display area. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area 91 (see FIG. 43) for performing variable display of the effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, there is provided a first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”. ing. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”). May be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example. Moreover, the 1st special symbol display 8a and the 2nd special symbol display 8b may each be comprised by the combination of monochrome LED and 7 segment LED, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is established. After the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, for example, a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the first special symbol) And a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed and a state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time elapses, the display result (stop symbol) Is derived and displayed.

  In this embodiment, winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding a temporary stop before so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, the symbol is temporarily stopped a plurality of times (in this example, 1 to 3 times) after the symbol variable display is started until the symbol display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. (See FIGS. 9, 10, 44 to 46, and 83).

  In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established by giving priority to the winning at the second starting winning port 14 out of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14. I try to let them. For example, when giving priority to winning in the second start winning opening 14, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed. For example, even when the first reserved memory number is not zero, the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed until the second reserved memory number becomes zero. Note that the variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to winning in the first start winning opening 13. Further, the variable display start condition may be established in the order in which the start winnings are generated regardless of the winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning ports 14.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) is performed. There is provided a second decorative symbol display 9b. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display. .

  Further, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may not be provided.

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display 9b. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big-hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the variable symbol display result of normal symbols is successful, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is kept open for a predetermined time. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (probability variation state) or the short time state (time shortening state), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state for a long time compared to the normal state. Is done. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, the display screen of the effect display device 9 conceals the short-time state after the big hit or the latent probability changing state described later (the fact that the state has been changed to the probability changing state despite being changed to the probability changing state). The area for displaying the number of times (the number of executions) that the derivation display of the stop symbol (display result) of the effect symbol and the temporary stop display of the temporary stop symbol of the effect symbol have been performed since the transition to the game state) , A number display area 92. See FIG.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays a total number (total number of pending storage) that is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count (the total pending memory count). Hereinafter, it is referred to as a summed pending storage display area 93 (see FIG. 43). Since the total pending storage display area 93 for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition. Since the total reserved memory display area 93 is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol) (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the variable symbol display result is a win, for example, it is determined that a predetermined condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 32, and the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. You may make it control to. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable winning ball device 15 may be immediately controlled to be in an open state without performing variable display of the normal symbol. Also, for example, when a game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is variably displayed, but the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is unconditionally set without determining whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is a hit. You may make it control to an open state. In this case, an area for storing a hit flag indicating a normal symbol hit becomes unnecessary, and the RAM capacity can be reduced.

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Furthermore, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than in the normal state and the short time state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the normal symbol The variable display time is shortened, and the opening time and opening frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. Further, even in the short-time state (the gaming state in which the special symbol variable display time is reduced), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased and the variable symbol variable display time is shortened. The opening time and opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. The state in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended as compared with the normal state means a state in which the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. It is not necessary to increase both the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 in the probability changing state or the short time state, and only the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be increased. May be increased.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state and the time reduction state are controlled in the same manner except that the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol in the probability variation state is higher than that in the normal state and the time reduction state. In other words, in both the probabilistic state and the short-time state, the variable symbol display time is shortened, the probability of hitting the regular symbol variable display result is increased, and the variable symbol variable display time is shortened and variable. The open extension of the winning ball apparatus 15 is performed. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variable symbol variable display time is shortened even in the probability variation state, the probability variation state in this embodiment may be referred to as a probability variation time short state. In addition, you may make it perform different control by a probability change state and a time-short state. For example, the special symbol variable display time may be shortened only when the time is short.

  A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided at the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball lamp 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. Is provided.

  An operation button 120 is provided on the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 for the player to operate during the game.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display 9a. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  Next, the type of jackpot and the jackpot will be described.

  When the special symbol stop symbol becomes a probability variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) of the jackpot symbol, it shifts to a jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as probability variation jackpot). In other words, the special variable prize-winning device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning device 20 is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins a big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol is changed to a probability change symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later), the big hit gaming state is continued for 15 rounds.

  Further, when the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a non-probable variation symbol of the big hit symbol, it shifts to a big hit gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a non-probable variable big hit or a normal big hit). In other words, the special variable prize-winning device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. In this embodiment, the big hit game state is continued for 15 rounds even when the big hit game state is shifted to the game based on the fact that the stop symbol has become an uncertain variable symbol.

  In addition, when the special symbol stop symbol becomes a special probability variation symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sudden probability variation symbol), a special jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a “sudden probability variation symbol”) that allows the player to recognize that the gaming state has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. It is called probable big hit.) In the sudden probability big hit, the special variable winning device 20 is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In the sudden probability change jackpot, the special variable winning device 20 is opened for one round until it is closed, and the gaming state for the sudden probability change jackpot is continued for two rounds. When a sudden big odd hit is generated, unlike the big round of 15 rounds, the stage display is not proceeding in turn on the stage display device 9, but the game state seems to have suddenly shifted to the rounded state. A special performance is performed to show the person.

  Further, when the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a small hit game, the game shifts to a small hit game state in which the game value given to the player is smaller than the big hit game state. That is, it shifts to a gaming state in which the special variable winning device 20 is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, in the small hit game state, the same game value as the game value given to the player when a sudden probability change big hit occurs is given. However, unlike the case of sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is not shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit gaming state ends. From this, the player expects the occurrence of a probable big hit suddenly rather than the small hit. Even when a small hit occurs, a special effect similar to that at the time of sudden big odd hit is executed. Such a special effect is called a two-round effect.

  Next, game state transition will be described.

(1) When the game is in the normal state or in the short-time state, the winning game is a big hit with the probability change symbol (excluding the sudden probability change symbol), and when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is shifted from the normal state or the short-time state to the positive change state. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (either one or both of the background image and the background color) is changed to a background indicating that the probability change state is being established.

(2) In the probability variation state, the probability variation symbol (excluding sudden probability variation symbol) is a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, the probability variation state is maintained without change. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased continuously, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. It is done. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the probability changing state is in effect.

(3) In the normal state or the short-time state, a big hit is suddenly made with the probability variation symbol, and when the big-hit game is finished, the gaming state is shifted from the normal state or the short-time state to the positive variation state. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the chance mode is being performed.

(4) When the probability change state suddenly becomes a big hit with a probability change symbol, and when the big hit game ends, the probability change state is maintained without changing. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased continuously, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. It is done. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the chance mode is being performed.

(5) A big hit is made with a non-probable variable in the normal state or the time-saving state, and when the big-hit game is ended, the time-short state is controlled by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. That is, when the gaming state is the normal state, the transition is made from the normal state to the short-time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations, and when the gaming state is the short-time state, the short-time state is continued for a predetermined number of fluctuations. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the time is being reduced. Then, when the fluctuation of the predetermined number of fluctuations is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short time state to the normal state. At this time, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that it is in a normal state.

(6) A big hit is made with a non-probability variable symbol in the probability changing state, and when the big hit game is ended, the time is controlled to be reduced by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. In other words, the state is shifted from the probability variation state to the short time state by a predetermined number of times of variation. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the time is being reduced. Then, when the fluctuation of the predetermined number of fluctuations is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short time state to the normal state. At this time, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that it is in a normal state.

(7) In the normal state, the short time state, or the probability changing state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game ends, the normal state, the short time state, or the probability changing state is continued without change. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the chance mode is being performed.

  The transition of the gaming state as described above is an example, and the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  In this embodiment, control that hides that the game state has been changed to the probability change state at a predetermined rate even though the game has been changed to the probability change state due to the end of the jackpot game after the big hit game is ended. Execute. That is, a non-probable variable symbol is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol (note that the special symbol stop symbol derives and displays the probability variable symbol), and after the big hit game, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. It changes to the background which shows that it is in a time-short state, and the production control which makes it appear that it has shifted to the time-short state is performed. In this way, a gaming state in which effect control that makes it appear that the state has been shifted to the time-short state despite the transition to the probability variation state is referred to as a latent probability variation state. It is said that the player has been transferred to the probability change state even when the background indicating that the state is in a short time state is displayed by shifting to the latent probability change state at a predetermined rate after the end of the probability change big hit game. Expectation can be given and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the short-time state is normally controlled to the short-time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game, but the end of the short-time state is notified before the predetermined fluctuation number is reached. Then, effect control is performed to make the time-short state appear to be extended by the remaining number of fluctuations (see FIG. 44 and the like). Thus, the gaming state in which the effect control that makes it appear that the time-short state is extended is referred to as a time-shortened state. By pretending that the short-time state has been extended, it is possible to have an expectation whether or not the short-time state will be extended at the end of the short-time state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this embodiment, even when the state is changed to the latent probability changing state, the effect control that makes the time-short state appear to be extended is executed. In the latent probability change state, the short time extension state is continued until a big hit or a small hit occurs. Therefore, as the number of times of change after shifting to the time extension state increases, the expectation of the latent probability change state increases, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Next, the display of the effect symbols (variable display, stop display, temporary stop display), stop symbols and the like in the effect display device 9 will be described.

  In the effect symbol display area of the effect display device 9, variable display of effect symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. That is, in the effect symbol display area of the effect display device 9, “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect symbol display area based on the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. In each of the effect symbol display areas, the variation of the effect symbol is started, and for example, a fixed effect symbol that is a variable display result of the effect symbol in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “medium” is stopped and displayed (derived display). To do. The procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed effect symbol is not limited to the procedure for stopping and displaying the effect symbol in a predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. In each of the “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas, there may be included one that stops and displays the effect symbols that become the confirmed effect symbols at the same time.

  In the period from the start of variable display of the production symbol to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the finalized design symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” production symbol display areas, the variable display of the production symbol The state may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state refers to an effect symbol that is not yet stopped when the effect symbol stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation symbol”). Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas) constitutes a predetermined jackpot combination. In the remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect symbol display area, etc.) that has not yet been stopped when the effect symbol (for example, an effect symbol indicating “7” alphanumeric characters) is stopped, In the display state where is changing, or in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, all or part of the effect symbols change in synchrony while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination Is in the display state. Corresponding to the reach state, the effect display device 9 displays a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol, changes the display mode of the background image, There are cases where the pattern variation is changed. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the change in the variation mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, the variable display state of the production symbol may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit”. In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player is made depending on a variable display mode of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train (chance eyes)”, “main notice”, “development chance eyes”, and “end of development chance eyes” are set to be executable. In addition, the specific effect in this embodiment should just change a special figure fluctuation time according to whether a corresponding effect operation is performed. For example, when the specific effect is executed, it is only necessary that the special figure change time becomes longer than when the specific effect is not executed.

  In the specific effect of “slip”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more effect symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “left”) are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of effect symbol display areas in the temporarily stopped display of the effect symbol display areas (For example, one or both of the “left” effect symbol display area and the “right” effect symbol display area, or both) An effect display is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display or changing the effect symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the produced design symbol is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the effect symbol may be re-fluctuated after the effect symbol is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed is confirmed.

  In the specific effect of “pseudo-ream (chance eye)”, “Left”, “ After changing the effect symbols in all of the “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas, after temporarily stopping the effect symbols in all effect symbol display areas, in all effect symbol display areas The effect display for changing the effect symbol again (pseudo continuous fluctuation) can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream (chance eyes)”, the pseudo ream chance eyes GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 2 (A) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. A production symbol constituting either one is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” effect symbol display area, and “middle symbol” is displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “Main notice”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then the confirmed effect symbols are displayed in all effect symbol display areas. Before the stop display (final stop display), for example, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state by the effect display that is associated with the reach effect in advance or the effect display that is different from the effect display that is associated in advance. An effect display for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is performed as an effect operation that becomes the main notice effect.

  For the specific effects of “Development Opportunities”, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” and then predetermined in all effect symbol display areas. After the effect symbols constituting the development chance included in the special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the effect symbols as the reach state. As an example, in the specific effect of “Development Chance”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The effect design to be displayed is temporarily stopped. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific production of “End of Development Opportunity”, the production symbols are changed in all of the production symbol display areas of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” and then developed in all the production symbol display areas. An effect display is performed in which an effect symbol of a predetermined combination as a chance is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “development opportunity” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol.

  In addition, during the variable display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production and the specific production, for example, by displaying other than the variable display mode of the production symbol, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image, A sub-notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may be a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, sub-notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are set to be executable. It should be noted that the sub-notice effect in this embodiment is not particularly limited as long as the change time of the special symbol does not change depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed.

  In the “character display” sub-notice effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, and then two or more effect symbol display areas (for example, “ Effect display for displaying a character image prepared in advance in a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 9 before the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas, etc. .

  In the sub-notification effect of “Step-up image”, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then in two or more effect symbol display areas. Before the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect display for switching and displaying a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order may be performed in the display area of the effect display device 9. In the sub-notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, The effect display in the sub-notice effect may be terminated without switching the image.

  In the “mail display” sub-notice effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then the effect is displayed in two or more effect symbol display areas. There is an effect display in which the effect operation changes, for example, the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 is changed in response to the operation button 120 being operated by the player before the symbol is temporarily stopped. Done.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, after the variable display of the production symbol is started, the variable display state of the production symbol does not become the reach state, but the predetermined design. There is a case where the confirmed effect symbol that becomes one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 in the special combination is stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable symbol display state has reached the reach state after the variable symbol symbol display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, the determined effect symbol that is a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special jackpot symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “3”) among the special symbols that become the 15 round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the determined effect symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed effect symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are symbol numbers “1” to “1” that are variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9, for example. Among the 8 design symbols, any one of the design symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the effect symbol display area. In this way, the effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped. The variable display mode of the displayed effect symbol is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a probability variable big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “7”) among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined probability variation big hit combination The finalized design that becomes Here, the confirmed effect symbols that are probable big hit combinations are symbol numbers “1” to “1” that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas in the effect display device 9, for example. Among the 8 design symbols, any one of the design symbols with odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the effect symbol display area. The effect symbols whose odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are called probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect is The variable display mode of the effect symbol in which the confirmed effect symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is displayed without being executed is referred to as the variable display mode of “first probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a probability variable big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “7”) among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a reach effect different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, a fixed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. . In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after a reach production different from the case where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the production symbol in which the finalized design symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “second probability variation” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a probability variable big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “7”) among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, the normal jackpot combination is confirmed after the reach effect is executed, which is the same as when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal”, or the reach effect is not executed. The effect design may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect Is not executed, and the variable display mode of the effect symbol in which the fixed effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is referred to as a variable display mode of “third probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. .

  As described above, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed effect symbol that is the probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed by variable display of the effect symbol. , It is determined that the probability change state is reached after being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “third probability variation”, the final effect that is a normal jackpot combination in the variable display of the effect symbol is the same as when the variable display mode is “normal”. The symbol is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize whether or not the probability variation state is obtained from the variable display result of the effect symbol. In other words, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is included in the special display result that is determined to be controlled to the probability variation state. On the other hand, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled to the probability variation state.

  When a 2 round big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating a number of “5”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol is not in the reach state, A finalized design that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, or a finalized design that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 2B is stopped or displayed, or FIG. ) May be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4. Note that the chances of success TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4 may be determined in advance as combinations of effect symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when a 2 round jackpot symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “5”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state. Correspondingly, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the effect symbols in which various confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When a small hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “1”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is the same as when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “surprise”. After the effect symbols are variably displayed, the confirmed effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the confirmed effect symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. May be displayed in a stopped state, or a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined reach combination may be displayed in a stopped state. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game being a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is a small hit symbol, the variable display mode of the effect symbols in which various confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed is as follows. This is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed effect symbol that is one of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 2C is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “surprise”, and the variable display mode is “small”. In the case of “winning” or the like, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol. In other words, when a confirmed effect symbol that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the effect symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” due to the variable display mode of “accuracy”. Determine. After the variable display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues.

  When the variable display mode of the effect symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, during the variable display of the effect symbol, There is a case where a promotion effect during change as a specific change display is executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, after the effect symbols that are normally a big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the effect display device 9, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas, the same effect symbols are all changed again, and the variation is made again. Is stopped and displayed as a finalized design (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display is performed as the changing promotion effect. After changing the effect symbol again, a promotion promotion failure effect during change is performed in which the confirmed effect symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display effect design is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After the change, the promotion effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed effect symbol which becomes the probability variation big hit combination.

  When the variable display result of the variable display result is “big hit”, if the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed for 15 rounds of big hit status After the control, the jackpot promotion effect is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state during the period until the 15 round big hit state is finished. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the change of the first special symbol or the effect symbol after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  The jackpot promotion effect includes a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probable change state despite the fact that the confirmed effect symbol is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect display device 9 variably displays the effect symbol, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect display device 9 displays an effect image indicating the roulette game. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette entered the “even number” in the jackpot promotion failure production and displayed the effect image “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production was thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. In response to the special symbol indicating the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. By executing the success promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit gaming state is finished, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state. Corresponding to the special symbol showing the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special figure game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, By the time the gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state.

  The effect display device 9 performs variable display of the color symbol in the “left” color symbol display area corresponding to the variable symbol special symbol display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a. In response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 8b, the variable display of the symbol in the "right" color symbol display area is performed. When the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the fixed color symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” color symbol display area. . As an example, when a special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. Then, the color design indicating “yellow” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. In addition, when any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7”, which are the 15-round jackpot symbols, is stopped and displayed as the special symbol for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, “Left In the color symbol display area “”, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the determined color symbol. Further, when a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, a fixed color is displayed in the “left” color symbol display area. A color symbol indicating “blue” is stopped and displayed as a symbol. On the other hand, when the special symbol indicating the number “1” that is the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. Then, the color design indicating “green” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. If any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, In the color symbol display area, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color symbol. When a special symbol showing a symbol “-” that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, it is displayed as a confirmed color symbol in the “right” color symbol display area. The color design indicating “blue” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag, the value of the total pending storage number counter, the value of the hourly number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are backed up. Stored in RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). In addition, a clear signal indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, an input driver that provides the game control microcomputer 560 with detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a. The circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b that variably display the decorative symbol, and the effect display device 9 that variably displays the attractive symbol.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the display of the first decorative symbol display device 9a and the second decorative symbol display device 9b via the output port 106 based on the effect control command, and also performs a VDP (video display processor) 109. The display control of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 4 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 inputs an operation signal from the operation button 120 via the input port, and performs a game effect based on the input operation signal.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. A routine is a group of instructions (codes) for executing a specific process in a program. A procedure in which a series of instructions for performing a certain process is described as a procedure, and a function (function) that is a function that adds a calculation process to given information and returns a result of the process are classified into routines. In particular, even if the program code is not independent, if a certain amount of code is concentrated for a specific process, the part can be regarded as a routine. Routines are broadly divided into two groups depending on their position in the program. These routines are called first when starting a program, and the routine that manages the progress of the entire program is called the "main routine". A routine that operates in this manner is called a “subroutine”.

  When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15, including S44 and S45).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, value of total pending memory counter, value of time reduction counter, etc.), output An area where the output state of the port is stored (output port buffer), a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like.

  Moreover, CPU56 transmits the command regarding a power failure recovery as an initialization command at the time of electric power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. Here, as a command related to power failure recovery, a power failure recovery specification command that specifies that the power failure recovery screen is displayed, and a time reduction number that specifies the number of times when the power failure occurs when the gaming state at the time of the power failure occurs A designation command and a total pending memory number designation command for designating the total pending memory number at the time of power failure are provided. In addition, instead of transmitting the combined reserved memory number designation command, a command (first reserved memory number designation) that designates the first reserved memory number based on the value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts the first reserved memory number. Command), and a command for specifying the second reserved memory number (second reserved memory number designation command) is transmitted based on the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number. Also good. Further, when the value of the first reserved memory number counter or the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 0, these commands may not be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, and a payout stop An initial value is set to a flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the effect display device 9.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34. Execute control.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process for notifying an abnormal winning when it detects that a game ball has won a prize winning opening at a time other than the regular time (step S23: abnormal winning notifying process).

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining jackpot symbols used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) MR1: Determine the detachment symbol (stop symbol) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for detachment symbol determination)
(2) MR2-1: Determines the type of jackpot ("normal", "first probability variation", "second probability variation", "third probability variation", "surprise probability") when generating the jackpot (for determining the jackpot type)
(3) MR2-2: Determines whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state (whether or not to generate reach) when the big hit determination result is out of place (for reach determination)
(4) MR3: The variation pattern type of the production symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is determined as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance (for variation pattern type determination).
(5) MR4: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the effect symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) (for variation pattern determination)
(6) MR5: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(7) MR6: Determine the initial value of MR5 (for determining MR5 initial value)

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number in (2) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol in (6). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may make it use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(5). For example, an MR2-1 initial value random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot type determining random number may be provided. Then, in addition to the MR5 initial value random number, the MR2-1 initial value random number may be updated by the initial value random number update processing in steps S18 and S25. By doing so, it is possible to more randomly determine the jackpot type (special jackpot symbol) at the time of determining the jackpot, especially a probability variation symbol (for example, “7”) or a sudden probability variation symbol (for example, “5”). Can be generated more randomly. Therefore, the probability big hit can be generated more randomly, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a random number generated by the hardware (random number circuit 503) built in the game control microcomputer 560. The big hit determination random number is used as the big hit determination random number. Software random numbers generated based on the program may be used.

  In this embodiment, the random numbers (particularly, MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4) shown in FIG. 7 are used for both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation. However, the random number related to the variation of the first special symbol may be different from the random number related to the variation of the second special symbol.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to a normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 and the open / close state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S31). Specifically, the payout control is performed in accordance with winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S32: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in accordance with values of a start flag and a special symbol process flag set in a variation pattern setting process described later. The special symbol display control process set in the output buffer is performed (step S33). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag is set in the special symbol process, the CPU 56 outputs the output every 0.2 seconds. The display control data value set in the buffer is incremented by one. Instead of using the start flag and the end flag, the CPU 56 may update the value of the display control data based on the value of the special symbol process flag. For example, when the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (1 in this embodiment), the CPU 56 sets the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the value of the display control data may be incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds until 4). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  For example, the CPU 56 checks a special symbol pointer to be described later, and performs variable display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b corresponding to the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Run. At this time, since the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number is zero when the total reserved memory number is not zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the special symbol pointer is set to “first”, and if the second reserved memory number is 0, the special symbol pointer is set to “second”. In the case where the special symbols are variably displayed in the order of the start winning prize, for example, a reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) described later is confirmed, and data set in the first area of the reserved specific area The special symbol pointer is set to “first” or “second” based on whether the symbol is “first” or “second”. Then, the CPU 56 specifies whether the first special symbol is variably displayed or the second special symbol is variably displayed based on the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and the special symbol corresponding to the specified special symbol is selected. Variable display on the symbol displays 8a and 8b is executed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Instead of using the start flag and the end flag, the CPU 56 may switch the value of the display control data based on the value of the normal symbol process flag. For example, in the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 confirms the number of passages through the gate based on the value of the normal symbol process flag and determines whether or not the normal symbol is a hit and determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol. Processing, normal symbol variation processing for executing various processing during normal symbol variation, normal symbol stop processing for stopping and displaying the normal symbol, and opening and closing of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) after the normal symbol is hit The normal electric accessory actuating process for performing the control is executed. In this case, for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag becomes a value (for example, 1) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process, the value of the normal symbol process flag becomes a value (for example, 2) corresponding to the normal symbol stop process. Until then, the value of the display control data may be incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. The big hit determination table is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with random R (random number for big hit determination) are set (FIGS. 8A and 8B). The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table (see FIG. 8A) used in a normal state or a short time state, and a probable change big hit determination table (see FIG. 8B) used in a probability change state. . The numerical values described in the left column of FIGS. 8A and 8B are the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value. The CPU 56 compares the value of the random R with the jackpot determination value, and determines that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit if the value of the random R matches any one of the jackpot determination values. Further, the CPU 56 compares the random R value with the small hit determination value, and determines that the small hit is made when the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values.

  The jackpot type determination table includes each jackpot type (“normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, “surprise”) compared with the random number for determining the jackpot type (MR2-1). FIG. 8C is a table in which determination values to be allocated are set (FIG. 8C). When it is determined to win the jackpot based on the random R, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determining random number. Here, the jackpot type and the special jackpot symbol correspond to each other. Specifically, when “normal jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol (determined special symbol) is “3”. When “probability big hit (first probability variation big hit, second probability variation big hit, third probability variation big hit)” is determined as the big hit type, the special symbol stop symbol (determined special symbol) becomes “7”. When “suddenly promising big hit” is determined as the big hit type, the special symbol stop symbol (determined special symbol) is “5”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8C, the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol and the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol are provided separately, and the second special symbol is provided. In the big hit type determination table, no determination value is assigned to the big hit type “surprise”. Therefore, when a big hit has occurred based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the “surprise” is not determined as the big hit type. However, even when a big hit occurs based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, a determination value may be assigned so that “surprise” is determined as the big hit type. Further, instead of dividing the table for the first special symbol and the table for the second special symbol, the jackpot type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined using one jackpot type determination table. .

  If it is determined to be a small hit based on the random R, the special symbol stop symbol is automatically determined to be “1” (without using the big hit type determining random number). If it is decided to make a deviation based on the random R, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, “9”, “−” are used as the special symbol stop symbols based on the random symbol for determining the loss symbol. "Is determined.

  In addition, as for the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, one of the two LEDs is a big hit symbol / small hit symbol (a common symbol for big hit / small hit), and the other is an off symbol. Further, the stop symbol of the production symbol is a display result for designating the display results (first probability variation big hit, second probability variation big hit, third probability variation big hit, normal big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit, off) determined by the CPU 56. It is determined by the CPU 101 for effect control based on the specific command.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the display result of the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is as follows. Decide on either. The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the big hit determination random value. The big hit determination random value is the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value shown in FIG. If it matches, it will be determined as a big hit or a small hit for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  9 and 10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the variation pattern (variation time) of the effect symbol used in this embodiment. In FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, “Special figure change time” indicates the change time (variable display period of identification information) of a special symbol. The variation pattern indicates the variation time of the special symbol. Since the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol, the “special symbol variation time” also indicates the variation time of the effect symbol. Hereinafter, it may be expressed simply as a variation pattern of a special symbol or a variation pattern of a production symbol.

  In FIG. 9, symbol variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the symbol when the variable display result is “losing” is “non-reach” and “reach” are shown. Illustrate. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1-1 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. Variation patterns of non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 to non-reach PC1-2, non-reach PD1-1 to non-reach PD1-6 are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3-5 are provided as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the symbol variable display mode is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  Further, FIG. 10 illustrates a symbol variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, super PA4-4 are provided as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. 1 to Super PA4-8, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-4, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-4, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-4, Super PC4-1 and Super PC4-2, Super PD1- 1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-3, Special PG3 1 to special PG3-3 variation patterns are prepared.

  Here, “pseudo continuous fluctuation” means that a plurality of fluctuations are executed by continuously executing a temporary stop and re-variation (variation restart) a predetermined number of times during a single fluctuation of the symbols. This is a change to be shown (that is, a change that makes it be recognized that there are multiple fluctuations in a pseudo manner). The fluctuation pattern (such as non-reach PA1-5) of the “pseudo ream (chance eye)” can be temporarily stopped once to four times during the time of one symbol fluctuation, This is a variation pattern for notifying (notifying) that the possibility of a big hit is high. On the other hand, the fluctuation patterns (non-reach PD1-1 to non-reach PD1-6) of “pseudo-continuous (2 times)” to “pseudo-continuous (4 times)” are fluctuation patterns of normal fluctuation (non-reach at time reduction or probability change). Reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, non-reach PC1-2) is a variation pattern for making it appear to be executed 2 to 4 times.

  In the fluctuation pattern (non-reach PD1-1 to non-reach PD1-3) of “pseudo-continuous (twice)” to “pseudo-ream (four times)”, fluctuations in normal fluctuations of “no shortening” at the time of time reduction or probability change It is devised to make the pattern (non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1) appear to be executed two to four times in a pseudo manner. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation pattern (non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1) at the time of time reduction or probability change is 3.80 seconds, and 3.80 seconds have elapsed since the start of the pattern fluctuation. Although the stop symbol is derived and displayed later, the variation time of the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous (twice)” is 8.60 seconds, and the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after 3.80 seconds from the start of the symbol variation. The temporary stop display of the temporary stop symbol is performed for 1 second (this is the same time as the symbol stop time during which the special symbol stop display is performed; Steps S130A and S130B in FIG. 39), and then the symbol re-varies, 3. A stop symbol is derived and displayed after 80 seconds. Similarly, the variation time of the variation pattern of “Pseudo-ream (3 times)” is 13.4 seconds, and the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after 3.80 seconds from the start of the symbol variation. The display is performed for 1 second, and then the symbol is re-variable. After 3.80 seconds from the re-variation, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop symbol is displayed for 1 second, and then the symbol is re-variable. The stop symbol is derived and displayed after 3.80 seconds from the re-variation. In addition, the fluctuation time of the “pseudo train (4 times)” is 18.2 seconds, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after 3.8 seconds from the start of the symbol change, and the temporary stop display of the temporary stop symbol is displayed for 1 second. After that, the symbol is re-variable, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after 3.8 seconds from the re-variation, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily displayed, and the symbol is re-variable again. 3. The temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after 80 seconds have elapsed, the temporary stop display of the temporary stop symbol is performed for 1 second, the symbol is re-variable again, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed after 3.80 seconds have elapsed since the re-variation. .

  Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern (non-reach PD1-4 to non-reach PD1-6) of “pseudo ream (2 times)” to “pseudo ream (4 times)”, “reserved 2-8 times shortened at time reduction or probability change” It is devised to make it appear that the fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation (non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2) is executed pseudo 2-4 times. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation pattern (non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2) at the time of time reduction or probability change is 0.80 seconds, and 0.80 seconds have elapsed after the start of the pattern fluctuation. Although the stop symbol is derived and displayed, the variation time of the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous (twice)” is 2.60 seconds, and the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after 0.80 seconds from the start of symbol variation, The temporary stop display of the temporary stop symbol is performed for 1 second (this is the same time as the symbol stop time during which the special symbol stop display is performed; Steps S130A and S130B in FIG. 39). The stop symbol is derived and displayed after 80 seconds. Similarly, the variation time of the variation pattern of “Pseudo-ream (3 times)” is 4.4 seconds. The temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after the lapse of 0.80 seconds from the start of the symbol variation, and the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped. The display is performed for 1 second, then the symbol is re-variable, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after 0.80 seconds from the re-variation, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily displayed, and then the symbol is re-variable. The stop symbol is derived and displayed after 0.80 seconds have passed since the re-change. In addition, the fluctuation time of the “pseudo train (4 times)” is 6.2 seconds, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after 0.8 seconds from the start of the symbol change, and the temporary stop display of the temporary stop symbol is displayed for 1 second. After that, the symbol is re-variable, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after 0.8 seconds from the re-variation, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily displayed, and the symbol is re-variable again. The temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped after the lapse of 0.80 seconds, and the temporary stop display of the temporary stop symbol is performed for 1 second. The symbol is re-variable again, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed after the lapse of 0.80 seconds. .

  In this embodiment, the gameability is improved by associating the number of fluctuations (100 times) in which the short-time state can be continued with pseudo continuous fluctuations (non-reach PD1-1 to non-reach PD1-6). Detailed description will be given later (see FIGS. 44 to 49).

  In this embodiment, the same variation pattern is used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. Different variation patterns may be used when it is performed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

  When receiving the effect control command indicating the variation pattern, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs variable display of the decoration symbol on the ornament symbol display for a time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the received effect control command. The effect design is variably displayed, and the effect display device 9 performs a type of display effect corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the received effect control command. At the same time, an effect using effect parts such as a lamp, LED, and speaker 27 is performed. That is, the fluctuation pattern indicates the fluctuation time and the aspect of the effect.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of effect symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by using eight signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal (capture instruction signal) that triggers the capture of the effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means that, for example, each of the first and second bytes of the effect control command data Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13, command 80XX (H) is an effect control that designates a decorative symbol and a variation pattern of the effect symbol that are variably displayed on the ornament symbol display and the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. Command (variation pattern command). “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving any one of the commands 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the decoration symbol display and the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the decoration symbols and the effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands that indicate whether a big hit, a small hit or a loss, and a type of big hit game (a type of big hit). The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H). It is called a command.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command).

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols and effect symbols is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbol and the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol and effect symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped, and when the variable display of the decorative symbol and effect symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped. Although the case where the common symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted is shown, different symbol confirmation designation commands (when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is terminated ( For example, a first symbol confirmation designation command, a second symbol confirmation designation command) may be transmitted.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) for designating display of an initial screen, which is transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) that designates the display of a power failure recovery screen that is transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  The command 93XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) for designating the number of time reductions when a power failure occurs when the gaming state at the time of the power failure is a time reduction state. XX is set to the number of times when a power failure occurs (for example, 1 to 100 times).

  Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is a probability change state. Command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is the time-short state. Command 9503 (H) is an effect control command (chance mode state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is the chance mode state. Commands 9500 (H) to 9503 (H) are referred to as background designation commands.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the commands A001 to A004 (H) display a fanfare screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the start of a big hit game (or a small hit game) (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) It is. The jackpot start designation commands include jackpot start 1 designation to jackpot start 4 designation commands depending on the type of jackpot. Of these, the big hit start 1 designation command A001 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a normal big hit (non-probability variable big hit) game. The big hit start 2 designation command A002 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a small hit game. The big hit start 3 designation command A003 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a probable big hit game. The big hit start 4 designation command A004 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a sudden probability change big hit (two round big hit) game.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the non-probability variable big hit end screen, that is, specifying the end of the big hit game, and specifying that it is a non-probable variable big hit (normal big hit) (a big hit end 1 designation command) : Ending 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) displays a probability variation jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the end of jackpot game and designating that the probability variation jackpot has been reached (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command) It is. Command A303 (H) displays an abrupt probability change jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command (designating ending 3 designation command: ending 3 designation) designating the end of jackpot game and designating that sudden probability change jackpot Command). In this embodiment, the effect control command for displaying the small hit end screen, that is, the end of the small hit game is not provided, but such a command may be provided.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. In this embodiment, the total pending storage number designation command command C2XX (H) is transmitted not only during the execution of the game control but also when the power failure is restored (see step S43). The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending storage number subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending storage number, but does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be specified by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning designation command) for instructing notification of abnormal winning.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are commonly used for variable display of identification information on the first decorative symbol display 9a and variable display of identification information on the second decorative symbol display 9b. When the presentation control microcomputer 100 is configured to control the first decoration design display 9a and the second decoration design display 9b, the game control microcomputer 560 can control the production control microcomputer. The types of commands transmitted to 100 can be prevented from increasing. In addition, when controlling the effect parts such as the effect display device 9 that produces effects in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits to the effect control microcomputer 100. It is possible to avoid increasing the types of commands that are executed.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the transmission timing of the effect control command. FIG. 15A shows an example when a start prize (first start prize or second start prize) occurs. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start prize designation command (or the second start prize designation command), and then continuously transmits the total pending storage number designation command. Specifically, a first start winning designation command (or second start winning designation command) is transmitted in a game control process based on a timer interrupt, and then a combined pending storage number designation command is transmitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15B, the game control microcomputer 560 receives a background designation command, a fluctuation pattern command, a special symbol identification command, a display result identification command, and a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command at the start of the fluctuation. Send. When the variable display time has elapsed, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted.

  Note that the order in which these commands are transmitted is not limited to the order shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, and can be changed as appropriate.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports related to a switch for detecting a game ball in the game control microcomputer. As shown in FIG. 16, the bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 include the count switch 23, the gate switch 32a, the winning port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, and 30a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the first starting port, respectively. A detection signal of the switch 13a is input. The input port 0 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the special winning opening is executed.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol process is used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the special symbol process is also shared.

  In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the first start port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13 or that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14. If the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if the first start winning or the second starting winning is generated, the start opening switch passing process is executed. Specifically, the data of the input port 0 (see FIG. 16) is read and loaded into a predetermined area of the register or RAM 55, for example (step S311). Then, the bitwise AND operation of the loaded contents (loaded data) and C0 (H) is performed, and if the operation result is not 0 (step S312), the start port switch passing process is executed (step S313). . More specifically, the start port switch passing process is executed when the calculation result changes to a state of 1 (0 in the determination immediately before 2 ms and 1 in the current determination). . Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. C0 (H) is a value corresponding to the input bit of the detection signal from the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a of the input port 0. In this embodiment, the contents of the input port 0 are directly loaded. However, when the contents of the input port 0 are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 in the switch process (step S21), the area The contents of may be loaded. Further, the process of step S312 may be replaced with an operation of performing exclusive OR with 00 (H) after masking bits 0 to 5 of the loaded contents (loaded data) (set to 0). .

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of special symbols can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), a special symbol is displayed by the timer (stop time timer). A time (symbol stop time) for stopping the stop symbol is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, if the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-hit release pre-processing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the small-hit release pre-processing is also a process for starting a small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  19 and 20 are flowcharts showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. As shown in step S311, when the logical product of the content loaded from the input port 0 (loaded data) and C0 (H) is performed and the operation result is not 0, that is, the first start switch 13a and the first switch In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the two start port switches 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the bit 6 of the loaded data is 1 (step S211). . As shown in FIG. 16, when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the detection signal input to bit 6 of the loaded data is 1 (high level). That is, the fact that bit 6 of the loaded data is 1 means that bit 6 of input port 0 has changed from 0 to 1. That is, it means that the second start port switch 14a is turned on.

  Also, if bit 6 of the loaded data is not 1, it means that bit 7 of input port 0 has changed from 0 to 1. That is, it means that the first start port switch 13a is turned on.

  When the bit 6 of the input port 0 is 1, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the start port pointer (step S212). If bit 6 of input port 0 is not 1, data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer (step S213).

  In this embodiment, a reserved memory number counter (first reserved memory number counter) that counts the first reserved memory number (the number of effective winning balls entered the first start winning opening 13), and a second reserved memory number (first 2 is a reserved memory number counter (second reserved memory number counter) that counts (the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning port 14). The start port pointer is set with data indicating the address of the first reserved memory number counter or the address of the second reserved memory number counter. That is, the data indicating “first” set in the start port pointer indicates the address of the first reserved memory number counter, and the data indicating “second” indicates the address of the second reserved memory number counter. The start port pointer is formed in the RAM 55. A first reserved memory number counter and a second reserved memory number counter are also formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. Instead of the start port pointer, data indicating “first” or “second” may be set in a register inside the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is 4 (step S214A). If the value of the pending storage number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S239. If the value of the reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer by 1 (step S214B). Specifically, when the starting port pointer indicates “first”, the value of the first reserved memory number counter indicating the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, and the starting port pointer indicates “second”. If it is, the value of the second reserved memory number counter indicating the second reserved memory number is increased by one. Then, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (step S215).

  In addition, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicated by the start port pointer is set in the area (step S216). Specifically, when the start port pointer indicates “first”, data indicating “first” is set, and when the start port pointer indicates “second”, “second” is set. Set the data indicating. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage (when neither “first” data nor “second” data is set), the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) is stored. Is set to 00 (H). In the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), data corresponding to the data (address data) indicated by the start port pointer may be set in an area corresponding to the value of the combined reserved storage number counter. . For example, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data corresponding to the data indicating “first” when the start port pointer indicates “first”. When the start port pointer indicates “second”, 02 (H) is set as data corresponding to the data indicating “second”.

  FIG. 21A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 21A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 21A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 21A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the 2-start winning opening 14. Therefore, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, if there is at least one second reserved memory, regardless of the presence or absence of the first reserved memory Since the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed, and control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed only when there is no second reserved memory and there is only the first reserved memory. As long as the winning order of the winning opening 13 alone and the winning order of the second starting winning opening 14 can be specified, it is not always necessary to specify the winning order to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. For this reason, when the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed with priority, the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) may not be provided.

  FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 21B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  The CPU 56 extracts a software random number (a counter value for generating a big hit type determination random number, etc.) and a random R (a big hit determination random number), and uses them as an extracted random number value as the first reserved storage buffer. And the process of storing in the storage area in the holding storage buffer indicated by the start port pointer of the second holding storage buffer (step S217). Specifically, when the start port pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the software random number and random R in the storage area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved memory number counter of the first reserved memory buffer. When the start port pointer indicates “second”, the software random number and random R are stored in the storage area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved memory number counter of the second reserved memory buffer.

  In the first reserved memory number buffer, each storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number is a continuous address area. In the second reserved memory number buffer, each save area corresponds to the second reserved memory number. The storage area is a continuous address area. In this case, the CPU 56 recognizes the head address of the reserved memory number buffer (the first reserved memory number buffer or the second reserved memory number buffer) based on the data indicated by the start port pointer. Then, the software random number and random R are stored in the storage area as an offset value obtained by multiplying the number of data per one reserved memory (the number of each random number) by the reserved memory number (value indicated by the reserved memory number counter).

  In step S217, the CPU 56 extracts the values of MR1 to MR4 (see FIG. 7) as software random numbers, and extracts the random R by reading the count value of the random number circuit 503. Further, each of the first to eighth areas in the reserved specific area illustrated in FIG. 21A further includes two storage areas for storing the extracted random number values (a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory and A storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage) may be formed. In the case of such a configuration, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter in the process of step S217, and the area (first through first) in the pending specific area corresponding to the count value (total pending storage number). In any one of the eighth areas), the random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the start winning port identified as having been won (corresponding to the data of the start port pointer). Alternatively, without providing a total pending storage number counter, each time the process of step S217 is executed, the value of the first pending storage number counter and the value of the second pending storage number counter are added, and the pending specification corresponding to the total value is added. In the area (any one of the first to eighth areas) in the area, the random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the start winning opening identified as having won. In the configuration in which the total pending storage number counter is provided, it is not necessary to perform processing (arithmetic processing) for adding the value of the first pending storage number counter and the value of the second pending storage number counter, and the number of processes can be reduced. In the configuration in which the memory number counter is not provided, the capacity of the RAM 55 can be reduced.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the start winning designation command indicated by the start port pointer (step S218). Specifically, when the starting port pointer indicates “first”, a first starting winning designation command is transmitted, and when the starting port pointer indicates “second”, the second starting winning specification is specified. Send a command. Also, a total pending storage number designation command is transmitted (step S219). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S29). Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is set in the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command.

  The CPU 56 may execute the process of setting the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command in the pointer before or after the process of step S212, or before or after the process of step S213.

  In step S219, the total reserved memory number designation command is configured to be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the reserved memory number indicated by the start port pointer is indicated. A reserved storage number designation command may be transmitted. Further, only the start winning designation command may be transmitted in step S218, and the total pending storage number designation command may not be transmitted in step S219.

  If the start port pointer indicates “second” (step S221), it is checked whether bit 7 of the loaded data is 1 (step S222). If bit 7 of the loaded data is 1, data indicating “first” is set in the start pointer (step S223), and the process proceeds to step S214A. When both the bits 6 and 7 of the loaded data are 1 by the processing of steps S221 to S223, that is, when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on. After the processing of steps S214A to S219 is executed for the second start port switch 14a corresponding to bit 7, the processing of steps S214A to S219 is executed for the first start port switch 13a corresponding to bit 6. Will be.

  In this embodiment, when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on, both switches are turned on by the process executed within 2 ms. A process based on this is executed. Therefore, for example, even if a situation occurs in which the period during which the switch that has detected the game ball has the detection signal turned on is extremely short, the processing based on the switch being turned on can be completed with certainty. In addition, the processing of steps S214A to S219 is completed within 2 ms (within 1 timer interrupt processing), based on the fact that both switches are turned on. Is done. Therefore, an accurate software random number value corresponding to the winning timing can be extracted.

  When the start port pointer does not indicate “second”, or when the start port pointer indicates “second” but bit 7 of the loaded data is not 1, the process proceeds to step S231.

  In step S231, it is confirmed whether both bit 6 and bit 7 of the loaded data are 1. If bit 6 and bit 7 of the loaded data are both 1, the start port pointer is cleared (step S239), and the process ends. That is, when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are in the on state, the processes after step S232 are not executed. That is, the fact that both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are in the on state means that in the specifying process (the process for specifying which start winning port 13, 14 has been won). Since a situation in which an erroneous determination has been made does not occur, the confirmation processing (steps S232 to S238) for confirming whether the result of the specific processing and the state of the detection signal input to the input port match is performed. Then, the start port pointer is cleared and the process is terminated.

  When both the bit 6 and the bit 7 of the loaded data are not 1 (when only one of the bits 6 and 7 is 1), the CPU 56 indicates that the start pointer indicates “second”. It is confirmed whether or not (step S232). When the start port pointer indicates “second”, it is confirmed whether or not the bit 6 of the input port 0 to which the detection signal of the second start port switch 14a is input is 1 (step S233). In the processing of steps S211, S212, when the bit 6 of the input port 0 is 1, “second” is set in the start port pointer. Therefore, when the start pointer indicates “second”, bit 6 of input port 0 should be 1. If bit 6 of input port 0 is 1, it is determined that the input port input is normal, and the process proceeds to step S239.

  If bit 6 of input port 0 is not 1, it is inconsistent with the determination result in step S211, so that the start port pointer is cleared to re-execute the determination process in step S211 (step S237). ) After reading the data of the input port 0 (see FIG. 16) and loading it into a predetermined area of the register or RAM 55, for example (step S238), the process proceeds to step S211. Note that the value of the second reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S214B, and the value of the total pending memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S219. That is, the value of the second reserved memory number counter and the value of the total reserved memory number counter are set to -1 (step S234).

  When the start port pointer does not indicate “second”, that is, when it indicates “first”, bit 7 of the input port 0 to which the detection signal of the first start port switch 13a is input is 1. Whether or not (step S235). In the processing of steps S211, S213, when the bit 7 of the input port 0 is 1, “first” is set to the start port pointer. Therefore, when the start pointer indicates “first”, bit 7 of input port 0 should be 1. If bit 7 of input port 0 is 1, it is determined that input port input detection is normal, and the process proceeds to step S239.

  If bit 7 of input port 0 is not 1, it is inconsistent with the determination result in step S211, so that the processing of steps S237 and S238 is performed again to execute the determination processing of step S211 again. The process proceeds to step S211. Note that the value of the first reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S214B, and the value of the total pending memory number counter is incremented by +1 in step S219, so that the value is incremented to +1. That is, the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the total reserved memory number counter are set to -1 (step S236).

  In this embodiment, after the game control microcomputer 560 executes a specifying process (a process for specifying which start opening has been won) based on the detection signal input to the input port 0, When the result of the specific process and the state of the detection signal input to the input port do not match, the specific process is executed again, so whether the winning to the first start port 13 has occurred or not to the second start port 14 It is reliably determined whether or not a prize has occurred. For example, if a winning is made to the first starting port 13 when the first reserved memory number is the upper limit of 4, the winning is not considered as a valid starting winning, but the first starting When it is determined that the winning at the mouth 13 is erroneously the winning at the second starting port 14, the value of the second reserved memory number is increased (when the second reserved memory number is not 4 which is the upper limit value). ). In other words, although it should not be a valid start prize, it will be a valid start prize. In this embodiment, the possibility of such a situation is reduced.

  However, the specific process may not be configured to be executed again. In such a configuration, the processes in steps S231 to S238 may not be executed. In this case, the program capacity is reduced as compared with the case where the specific process is executed again. In the case where the specific process is not executed again, the program is configured to shift to step S239 instead of the process to shift to step S231 in FIG.

  In addition, in order to prevent a situation where the specific process is repeatedly executed indefinitely, after the specific process is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the process of steps S231 to S238 is not executed, and the reserved storage specifying information The data stored in the storage area or the random number value stored in the reserved storage number buffer may be cleared, and the start port switch passing process may be terminated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific process is repeatedly executed indefinitely due to the influence of noise or the like and the gaming machine does not operate.

  Further, the specific process may not be executed again after the processes of steps S231 to S238 are executed. In that case, when the process of step S238 is executed, the start port switch passing process is terminated. Note that the contents of the storage area corresponding to the value of the pending storage number counter before being subtracted in the processes of steps S234 and S236 are the random numbers newly extracted when the processes of steps S214B and S216 are subsequently executed. However, when the process of step S238 is executed and the start port switch passing process is terminated (the same applies to the case where the process of step S238 is executed and the process proceeds to step S211 as in this embodiment). As a precaution, the contents of the storage area corresponding to the value of the pending storage number counter before being subtracted in the processing of steps S234 and S236 may be cleared.

  In addition, when the process after step S211 is performed again, if the process of step S218, S219 is performed again, a start winning designation | designated designation | designated command and a total pending | holding storage number designation | designated command will be transmitted twice. In order to avoid such a situation, when it is reliably determined whether a winning at the first starting port 13 or a winning at the second starting port 14 has occurred, a start winning designation command and What is necessary is just to comprise so that a total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the subroutine of step S313 is executed after the processing of steps S311 and S312. However, the subroutine of step S313 is not executed, and the processing of steps S311 and S312 is continued. The process of steps S211 to S239 may be executed when it is determined in step S312 that N (that is, there is a start prize).

  In the start port switch passing process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning port 13 or the process for the second start winning port 14 is executed. Data indicating “second” is set in the start port pointer. In the subsequent processing, processing corresponding to the data set in the start port pointer is executed. For example, taking the process of step S214B as an example, specifically, the first reserved memory number counter and the second reserved memory number counter are formed at consecutive addresses in the RAM 55, and the first at the beginning of the process of step S214B. The address of the reserved memory number counter is set in the register, and the value set in the start port pointer in the register (for example, the data indicating “first” is “0” and the data indicating “second” is “1”). ”) Is added, the value of the register after the addition is used as the address of the RAM 55, and 1 is added to the data at that address. According to such processing, the target of the addition processing is the first reserved memory number counter when the data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer, and indicates “second” in the start port pointer. When data is set, it is a second reserved memory number counter. That is, in one addition process, the value of the reserved memory number counter corresponding to the start winning opening that is turned on is automatically incremented by one. In other words, the processing for both start winning awards is made common.

  In addition, although the process of step S214B was taken as an example here, the process can be shared for the processes of step S216 and step S218. For example, data corresponding to the first start winning prize (address of the first reserved storage number buffer or command transmission table address of the first start winning designation command) is set in the register, and the start pointer is set in the register. By adding the value as an offset and setting the data based on the value of the register after the addition (in the case of step S216) and specifying the address of the command transmission table (in the case of step S218), one process is performed. , Data setting processing and command transmission table address designation can be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number buffer and the second reserved memory number buffer are separately provided is described as an example, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are common. A reserved storage number buffer may be provided. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a common reserved memory number buffer provided in common for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As shown in FIG. 22, the common reserved storage number buffer includes eight areas obtained by combining the reserved storage specifying information storage area and the random value storage area. In the common reserved storage number buffer, consecutive addresses are assigned to the reserved storage specific information storage area and the random value storage area.

  When the common reserved memory number buffer is used, the CPU 56 increments the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer by 1 in step S214B, increments the value of the total reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S215, and then proceeds to step S216. Instead of the above process, a process of setting the data indicated by the start port pointer in the reserved storage specifying information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer is executed. Specifically, the CPU 56 determines the position of the pointer that specifies the address of the data storage destination based on the total number of reserved memories (which may be obtained by adding the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number each time). By updating, data is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer.

  When specifying the head of the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer, for example, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data stored in the common reserved memory number buffer per one reserved memory (that is, the A value obtained by adding one storage specific information storage area) is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 22, two data storage areas, that is, a reserved storage specifying information storage area and a random value storage area, are provided in one common reserved storage number buffer. Therefore, a value obtained by adding 1 (that is, one reserved storage specific information storage area) to the value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved storage is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, when the total number of pending storages is 3, as shown in FIG. 22, the reserved storage specific information storage area corresponding to the offset value + 7 (a value obtained by doubling the total pending storage number 3 and adding 1). Set the data to. In this case, when the start port pointer indicates “first”, data indicating “first” is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area, and when the start port pointer indicates “second”. Sets data indicating “second” in the reserved storage specific information storage area. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, there are a total of three reserved storage specific information storage areas per reserved storage and two random value storage areas (for example, for jackpot type determination random numbers and jackpot determination random numbers). When a data storage area is provided, a value obtained by adding 1 (that is, one area of the reserved storage specific information storage area) to the value obtained by multiplying the total number of the reserved storage by 3 is obtained as an address offset value. The pointer may be updated according to the offset value.

  Further, when the initial position of the pointer for designating the data storage destination address is the first area of the common reserved memory number buffer (the reserved storage specific information storage area for the reserved storage 1 shown in FIG. 22), the CPU 56 May be obtained as an offset value of an address by multiplying the total number of pending storages by the number of data stored in the common pending storage number buffer for one pending storage. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 22, a value obtained by doubling the total number of pending storages may be obtained as an address offset value. Then, the CPU 56 may perform control so that the pointer is updated by setting the position of the pointer to the position moved by the offset value from the initial position. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, there are a total of three reserved storage specific information storage areas per reserved storage and two random value storage areas (for example, for jackpot type determination random numbers and jackpot determination random numbers). When a data storage area is provided, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of pending storages by three may be obtained as an address offset value.

  Further, instead of the process of step S217, the CPU 56 extracts software random numbers (counter values for generating big hit determination random numbers, etc.) and random R (big hit determination random numbers), and extracts them. A process of storing as a random value in a random value storage area at the head of an empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer is executed. Specifically, after setting the data in the reserved storage specific information storage area, the CPU 56 updates the position of the pointer that designates the address by one, and stores the random value in the random value storage area at the address pointed to by the updated pointer. Is stored. Note that the CPU 56 may perform the same processing for the number of types of random number values to be stored.

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks the value of the second reserved memory number (step S52). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed. If the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Data indicating “first” is set in (Step S53). If the second reserved storage number is not 0, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S54). By the processing of steps S52 to S54, on the condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0, control is performed so that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol.

  In addition, only when the gaming state is the short-time state or the probability-changing state (only when the state is the short-time state, only when the probability-changing state, or only when the state is the short-time state or the certainty-changing state), the variation display of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. Control may be performed so that the change display is prioritized. That is, the gaming state is confirmed, and when the gaming state is the normal state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in the order in which the start winnings are generated (the processing of steps S52 to S54 described above is performed). However, when the gaming state is the short-time state or the probability variation state, control is performed so that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, since the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened at a high frequency and the number of game balls is likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 in the short-time state or the probability changing state, the second starting winning hole 14 is high. The probability of occurrence of invalid start prizes (occurrence of second start prizes that occur after the second reserved memory number reaches 4) is high, but the second special symbol change display is displayed in the short-time state or the probable change state. By giving priority to execution, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of invalid start winnings at the second starting winning port 14.

  In this embodiment, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed with priority given that the second reserved memory number is not 0 will be described. However, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are described. It may be determined which of the stored memory numbers is greater than the stored number, and the special symbol corresponding to the one with the larger stored memory number is preferentially executed. For example, in step S52, it is confirmed whether or not the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number. If the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the process proceeds to step S53 and the first special symbol is displayed. If the first reserved memory number is not larger than the second reserved memory number, the process proceeds to step S54 and the second special symbol variable display is preferentially executed. Also good. In this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same number, the variable display of the first special symbol may be preferentially executed, or the second special symbol may be executed. The change display may be executed with priority. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferentially execute the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the larger one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In addition, since it is possible to preferentially start the fluctuation based on the winning at the start winning opening having the larger number of stored memories, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the invalid starting winning at the starting winning opening.

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1, and m (m = 2 to 8) th of the reserved memory specifying information storage area (holding specified area). Are stored in the (m-1) th area. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1, and is also stored in the m (m = 2 to 8) th area of the reserved memory specifying information storage area (holding specified area). Are stored in the (m−1) th area.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  When the common reserved memory number buffer as shown in FIG. 22 is used, in step S52, the CPU 52 confirms whether the second reserved memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the second reserved memory number counter. Or the second reserved memory number is 0 by checking whether or not data indicating “second” is set in each reserved memory specific information storage area of the common reserved memory number buffer. It may be confirmed whether or not. If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (see step S53). If the second reserved memory number is not 0, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (see step S54).

  Next, for example, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in step S55, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved storage specifying information in which data indicating “first” in the common reserved storage number buffer is stored. An area may be specified, and each random value stored in the random value storage area corresponding to the next address of the specified reserved storage specifying information storage area may be read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM. Further, for example, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, in step S55, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved storage specifying information storing data indicating “second” in the common reserved storage number buffer. An area may be specified, and each random value stored in the random value storage area corresponding to the next address of the specified reserved storage specifying information storage area may be read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM. Then, in step S56, the contents of the reserved storage specific information storage area and the random value storage area after the random address storage area corresponding to the specified reserved storage specific information storage area and the next address may be shifted.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S57). After that, the CPU 56 confirms the current gaming state based on the setting status of the flag indicating the gaming state (probability change flag, time reduction flag, chance mode flag), and performs control to transmit a background designation command corresponding to the current gaming state. Execute (step S58). Specifically, when the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set, a probability change state background designation command is transmitted, and when the time reduction state is set, a time reduction state background designation command is transmitted and the chance mode flag is set. When set, the chance mode state background designation command is transmitted, and when no flag is set, the normal state background designation command is transmitted.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (step S62). The big hit judgment module compares a big hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with a random number for big hit judgment, and determines that the big hit (normal big hit or probability variation big hit) or small hit is found if they match. It is a program that executes

  When the gaming state is a probable change state, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 8B is set, and the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state (ie In the case of a non-probable variation state, the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 8A is set is used.

  When it is determined to be a big hit (step S63), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that determining whether or not to win a jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but in the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or in the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the stop symbol is a big hit symbol.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the big hit type determination random number is read from the random number buffer area (step S72), and based on the big hit type determination random number, using the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. (Probability change "," second probability change "," third probability change "," surprising accuracy ") are determined (step S73). When the big hit type is determined, one of the big hit symbols (any of “3”, “5”, and “7”) as a special symbol corresponding to the big hit type is determined. In this embodiment, as described above, when the probability variation big hit (“first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”) is determined, the stop symbol becomes the probability variation symbol (“7”). . In addition, when the normal big hit (“normal”) is determined, the stop symbol becomes the non-probable variable symbol (“3”). When the sudden probability variation big hit (“surprise accuracy”) is determined, the stop symbol suddenly becomes the probability variation symbol (“5”). The jackpot type determination table is divided into a table for the first special symbol and a table for the second special symbol, so that the CPU 56 indicates that the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “ It is confirmed whether it is “first” or “second”, and a table for determining the jackpot type is selected.

  When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined, the CPU 56 determines the probability variation jackpot flag (“first probability variation jackpot flag” corresponding to the type of probability variation jackpot (“first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”). "" 2nd probability variation big hit flag "" "third probability variation big hit flag") is set (steps S74, S75). If the sudden probability change big hit is determined, the sudden probability big hit flag is set (steps S76 and S77). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S83).

  If it is determined not to be a big hit (N in step S63), if it is determined to be a small hit, the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag (steps S78, S79). Further, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as the small hit symbol (“1”) (step S80). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S83).

  When not making a small hit (N in Step S78), the CPU 56 reads out the random symbol for determining the symbol from the random number buffer area (Step S81), and determines the stop symbol based on the random number for determining the symbol outside (Step S82). . In this case, the off symbol (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, “9”, “−”) is determined. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S83).

  In this embodiment, as shown in steps S55 to S82, each random number read process and each counter are performed when the first special symbol variation display is performed and when the second special symbol variation display is performed. Although the update process (see steps S55 to S57) and the big hit or small hit determination process (see steps S61 to S82) are shown in common, they may be configured as separate processes. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer in step S53, the process of steps S55 to S82 is executed. Further, when the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the special symbol pointer in step S54, the CPU 56 executes the same processing as steps S55 to S82 as a separate processing. When the random number reading process, each counter updating process, and big hit or small hit determination process are configured as separate processes, only a part of the processes may be configured as a common subroutine. For example, if only the big hit or small hit determination process in steps S61 to S82 is configured as a common subroutine, and data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer in step S53, the processes in steps S55 to S58 are executed. Later, a subroutine for determining a big hit or a small hit may be called. Also, if data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer in step S54, a subroutine similar to steps S55 to S58 is executed as a separate process, and then a subroutine for determining a big hit or a small hit is called. Also good.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit based on a big hit determination random number, and when it is decided to make a big hit, a predetermined big hit type based on the big hit type determining random number (i.e., Non-probable big hit, 1st probable big hit, 2nd probable big hit, 3rd probable big hit, and sudden probable big hit) are determined. May be determined.

  Next, a determination table (FIGS. 25 to 34) used for selecting a variation pattern in the CPU 56 will be described.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 25 (A) to (F) and FIGS. 26 (A) to (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Depending on the determination result of the jackpot type, it is selected as a use table. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprising probability”. The random number MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, and special CB4. -2, special CC 4-1, and special CC 4-2.

  Here, as an example, if attention is paid to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, the big hit shown in FIG. The normal variation pattern type determination table 132A and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 25B used when the big hit type is “first probability change” include the normal CA 3-1 and the super CA 3-2. The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 is selected. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. In this way, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit that is selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132D (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected in the probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, 132I (in the short time state) When the selection) is compared with each other, the allocation of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. A random number value MR3 for determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, 132H, 132I used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special When the big hit type is other than “surprise”, such as CC4-1 or special CC4-2, the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. MR3 is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is set to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is determined to be different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. can do.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot shown in FIG. 25 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. The fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the big hit change pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 25 (E) used when the gaming state is a probabilistic change state, change patterns of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. Thus, paying attention to the case where the big hit type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F (selected when “first probability variation”), When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132G (selected when “second probability variation”) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H and 132I (selected when “surprise probability”) are compared with each other, pachinko games Determine the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type according to whether the gaming state in the machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state. Are different random value assignment of MR3 of, also, may be assigned a random number value MR3 for determining variation pattern type for different variation pattern type according to the playing state. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM 54 include small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. In the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”, a plurality of variation pattern types are determined based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Is selected as a use table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is for determining that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. The variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 27B is a big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132H for use. In the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 27C, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132I for use. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 25 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 26 (B), and FIG. Big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. 27C, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 27A used when the variable display result is “small hit”, and FIG. The small variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits and the small variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 27C are set to include common variation pattern types.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is determined to be “lost”. 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C includes a random number MR2-2 for determination of reach as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to any one of the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 and the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 28A, the reach determination random number MR2-2 for the reach determination corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number (total reserved storage number) is “0”. Among these, values in the range of “1” to “204” are assigned to the determination results of the non-reach HA 1-1, while values in the range of “205” to “239” are assigned to the determination results of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random number values MR2-2 for reach determination. Are assigned to the non-reach HA1-2 decision result. Further, corresponding to the case where the total number of pending storage is “2”, the number of random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than the number of random numbers assigned to the non-reach HA1-1 and the non-reach HA1-2. A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1 of the reach determination random numbers MR2-2 corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”, respectively. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to each of the determination results of −1 to non-reach HA 1-3, is used as the determination result of non-reach HA 1-4 or non-reach HA 1-5. assign. With such a setting, when the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variable symbol display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, When the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display state of the effect symbol is determined to be the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is composed of determination data assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Has been.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 29A, “1” to “1” among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” among the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in accordance with the determination result of reach HA 2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 is that the reach determination random number MR2-2 is determined in accordance with the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA2-2, a random number value MR2-2 for determining the reach is assigned in accordance with the case where the total number of pending storage is “1” or “2”. The determination result of the reach HA2-3 corresponds to the case where the total pending storage number is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed when the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “1”), compared to when it is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If this is the case, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened when the total pending storage number is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbols is not the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. 31, 32A, and 32B. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C includes a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the effect symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the variation pattern depending on whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the case where the random display value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” according to the variation pattern type. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type when the variable display result of the effect symbol is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 33, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponding to the case of non-reach fluctuation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CB1-2, a specific effect in which a value in the range of “1” to “100” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “end of development chance eyes” is executed. Assigned to the non-reach PA1-7 fluctuation pattern. With such a setting, in response to the determination that the variable display result is “lost” and the determination that the variable display state of the production symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern is set to non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach. It can be decided to reach one of the reach PAs 1-7, and an effect operation as a specific effect can be executed.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, in non-reach variation pattern type variation pattern 136A shown in FIG. 30A, among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, non-reach HA1. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to −1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to non-reach HA1-2. Values in the range of “231” to “241” are assigned corresponding to the reach HA1-3, and “237” to “241” corresponding to the non-reach HA1-4 and the non-reach HA1-5, respectively. A range value is assigned. Here, with respect to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 28A, the reach determination randomness corresponds to the case where the total pending storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “1”, and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “3”, “4”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “5” to “8”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total pending storage number is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA1-4 is larger than that when the total pending storage number is “0”. Lower. When the total pending storage number is “3”, “4”, or “5” to “8”, the total pending storage number is “0”, or “1” or “2” ”Is lower than the ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 9, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “main notice” is executed is 7.75 seconds, The special figure change time in the change pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of pending storages is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total pending storage number is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened compared to when the total pending storage number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the case of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 34, the variation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is Super CA2-3 or Super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-5. Assigned.

  In addition, with respect to a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, such as a variation pattern of super PA 3-4, super PA 3-8, and super PB 3-4, for example, The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2. The random value MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 is set in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA 2-1 and super CA 2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 is assigned. In addition, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. ing. For the variation pattern type of the super CB2-1, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. In this way, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 29A to 29C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the variable display state of the effect symbol being in the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. In addition, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the variable display state of the effect symbol being in the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  35 and 36 are flowcharts showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S91). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S91; Yes), the table selection shown in FIG. According to the setting, any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S92).

  If the big hit flag is off in step S91 (step S261; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S93). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S93; Yes), the table shown in FIG. According to the selection setting, any one of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set as a use table for determining any one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S94).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S93 (step S93; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. In accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 5, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbols is set to the reach state (step S95). At this time, the total pending storage number is specified by, for example, reading the total pending storage number count value (step S96). Subsequently, the random value MR2-2 for reach determination is read (step S97). Then, based on the reach determination random value MR2-2 read in step S97, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined by referring to one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S95 (step S95). S98).

  If a reach determination result indicating that there is a reach state is obtained in step S98 (step S99; Yes). In order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to each determination result with reach state such as the determination results of reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 in step S98. As the usage table, any one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 29A to 29C is selected and set (step S100A). On the other hand, when the reach determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained in step S98 (step S99; No), non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 and non-reach HB1 in step S98. -1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the use to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to each determination result without reach state As the table, any one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. 30A to 30C is selected and set (step S100B).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S92, S94, S100A, and S2100B, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is read (step S101A). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type read out in step S101A, by referring to the use table set in any of steps S92, S94, S100A, and S100B, a plurality of variation pattern types are selected. Either one is determined (step S101B).

  Here, in the processing of steps S101A and S101B, the variation pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a based on the establishment of the first start condition. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b based on the fact that the second start condition is established Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S101A and S101B, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S98, the numerical data indicating the common random number MR3 used for determining the variation pattern type is used to change by the common processing module. The pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S101B, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S101B in this way, FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 (A) are used as usage tables for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. And the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in (B) and the loss change pattern determination tables 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 are selected and set (step S101C). ). Subsequently, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is read (step S101D). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern read out in step S101D, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S101C (step S101E). .

  Here, in the processing of steps S101D and S101E, the variation pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a based on the establishment of the first start condition. Whether or not the second special symbol display 8b determines the variation pattern of the production symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. Instead, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S101D and S101E, the variation pattern is detected by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S98. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S101E, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command (see FIG. 13) corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S101E to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S102). Note that the special symbol variation time (variable display time) is determined by the processing in step S101E.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command indicating the variation of the special symbol (step S103). Specifically, when data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 transmits a first symbol variation designation command indicating the variation of the first special symbol, and the special symbol pointer is transmitted to the special symbol pointer. When the data indicating “second” is set, a second symbol variation designation command indicating the variation of the second special symbol is transmitted. It should be noted that the processing for setting the symbol variation designation command transmission table may be executed after the processing of steps S53 and S54. In this case, since it is not necessary to determine whether the variation of the special symbol is the variation of the first special symbol or the variation of the second special symbol in step S103, the burden of the determination process of the game control microcomputer 560 is reduced. The number of programs can be reduced.

  Note that the processing in step S102 may be executed after the processing in step S103. That is, the control for transmitting the variation pattern command may be executed after the control for transmitting the symbol variation designation command.

  Then, according to the setting of the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started to change (step S104). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Note that in the special symbol display control process of step S33 without using the start flag or the end flag, when the variation of the special symbol is controlled based only on the value of the special symbol process flag, in step S106, the CPU 56 A flag indicating whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed may be set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Note that the region (variation time timer) in which the variation time is set is the same both when the variation of the first special symbol is performed and when the variation of the second special symbol is performed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In this embodiment, the special symbol process is used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the special symbol process is also shared. Therefore, an area for storing the special symbol process processing program in the ROM 54 is also saved. Further, for example, the variable time timer (formed in the RAM 55) set in step S105 is shared by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which leads to a capacity saving of the RAM 55.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs any one of the display control 1 designation to the display result 7 designation control command (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of loss, big hit, small hit, or big hit. ) Is transmitted. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If it is not set, it is checked whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is not set, control is performed to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118). ). When the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 7 designation command (steps S116 and S117). When the big hit flag is set, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit one of the display results 3 to 5 designation command (steps S111 and S112). That is, when the first probability variable big hit flag is set, the display result 3 designation command is transmitted. When the second probability variation big hit flag is set, the display result 4 designation command is transmitted. When the third probability variation jackpot flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 5 designation command. If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set and the probability variation jackpot flag is not suddenly set, control for transmitting a display result 2 designation command is performed (steps S113 and S114). When the sudden probability big hit flag is set, control for transmitting a display result 6 designation command is performed (step S115).

  Next, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that the total pending storage number is subtracted by 1 is transmitted (step S119). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S120).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S121), and when the variable time timer times out (step S122), the symbol stop time (stop time of the special symbol stop symbol; For example, 1 second) is set and started (step S123). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S124). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Then, a control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (step S131). When data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol is terminated, and when data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer. The variation of the second special symbol is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (step S132).

  Note that the symbol confirmation designation command is a common command that is used when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are designated to stop, but the first special symbol designation (stop) is designated. A symbol confirmation designation command and a second symbol confirmation designation command for designating stop (determination) of the second special symbol may be provided. In this case, for example, at the time of Y in step S122, it may be specified whether the special symbol pointer indicates “first” or “second”, and the corresponding symbol confirmation designation command may be transmitted. In the process of step S132, it may be specified whether the special symbol pointer indicates “first” or “second” and a corresponding symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the stop time timer (step S132A), and checks whether the value of the stop time timer has become 0 (timed out) (step S132B). When the value of the stop time timer is not 0 (when not timed out), the processing is terminated as it is. When the value of the stop time timer becomes 0, the processing after step S133A is executed. The symbol confirmation designation command is set once when the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted so that the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted only once when the stop symbol is derived and displayed (see step S131). After that, the process of step S131 is not executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133A). If it is set, control for transmitting the jackpot start 2 designation command is performed (step S133B). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S133C).

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S133D). If set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (step S134), and performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command (step S135). Specifically, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, a big hit start 3 designation command is transmitted, and when the probability variation big hit flag is suddenly set, a big hit 4 designation command is transmitted, and the probability variation big hit flag and suddenly If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying the fact that the big hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). Note that the jackpot display time is different for the 15-round jackpot and the 2-round jackpot. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S139).

  When the big hit flag is not set (N in Step S133D), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (Step S139A). If it is set, 1 is subtracted from the hour / hour counter for counting the number of times of display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the short-time state (step S139B). (Step S139C). If the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the time reduction flag is reset (step S139D). In this embodiment, the time reduction state is continued until the transition of the special symbol 100 times is completed after the transition to the time reduction state.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S140).

  In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, when the big hit display time timer is set, the CPU 56 controls to open the big winning opening when the big hit display time timer times out, and sets the big winning opening opening time timer. A value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds for a normal big hit and a probable big hit, and 5 seconds for a sudden big odd hit) is set, and the special symbol process flag value is set during the big prize opening opening process ( Update to a value corresponding to step S306). The case where the big hit display time timer is set is the case before the start of the first round. When the interval timer (timer for determining the interval time between rounds) is set, when the interval timer times out, control is performed to open the big prize opening and the opening time ( For example, a value corresponding to 29 seconds is set for a normal jackpot and a probable big hit, and 5 seconds is set for a sudden probable jackpot, and the special symbol process flag value is set to open the big winning opening (step S306). Update to a value corresponding to.

  In the process during opening of the big prize opening, the CPU 56 does not finish the final round when the big prize opening time timer times out or the number of winning balls to the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, control for closing the special winning opening is performed, a value corresponding to the interval time is set in the interval timer, and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S305). Update. When the final round (15 rounds or 2 rounds) ends, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S307).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S151), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S152). Here, when the probability variation jackpot flag is set, a jackpot end 2 designation command is transmitted, and when the probability variation jackpot flag is set suddenly, a jackpot termination 3 designation command is transmitted, and the probability variation jackpot flag and sudden probability variation are transmitted. When the jackpot flag is not set, a jackpot end 1 designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S153), and the processing is ended. Note that the count switch detection time shown in FIG. 40 is a sufficient time for the game ball to be detected by the count switch 23 after winning the winning ball. For example, if it takes a maximum of 1.0 seconds for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening and be detected by the count switch 23, the count switch detection time is longer than 1.0 seconds.

  In step S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S156).

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the set flag (probability variation jackpot flag) is reset (step S157), the probability variation flag is set, and the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state (step S158). Next, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S159). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S160).

  When the probability variation jackpot flag is not set (N in step S156), it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is suddenly set (step S161). If the sudden probability change jackpot flag is set, the set flag (sudden probability change jackpot flag) is reset (step S162), and the chance mode flag is set to shift to the chance mode state (step S163). The probability change flag is set, and the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state (step S158). Next, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S159). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S160).

  If the sudden probability big hit flag has not been set (N in step S161), the CPU 56 sets a predetermined value (100 in this embodiment) to the hour / count counter (step S164). Also, a time reduction flag is set (step S159). In other words, in this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the short time state until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the variable display is finished. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S160).

  In the pre-opening process for small hits in step S308, the same process as the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305) is performed. However, instead of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large winning opening opening process, the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process. Further, in the small hit opening process in step S309, the same process as the big prize opening opening process (step S306) is performed. However, if it is not the final round, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308), and if it is the final round (second round), the value of the special symbol process flag Is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end processing (step S310).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S170). If the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S174. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the small hit flag is reset (step S171). Then, the small hit end display timer sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (small hit end display time) in the small hit end display timer ( Step S173), the process is terminated. It should be noted that the count switch detection time shown in FIG. 41 is a time sufficient for the game ball to be detected by the count switch 23 after winning the winning prize opening.

  In step S174, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S175). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the chance mode flag is set to shift to the chance mode state (step S176). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S177).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process in step S23. In the abnormal winning notification process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the abnormal notification prohibition flag is set (step S581). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in a main process executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S44 in FIG. 5). When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S585. If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in step S45 is decremented by 1 (step S582). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (steps S583 and S584).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S585). The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more is a state where a big hit game or a small hit game is being played. In such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the big winning opening, so it is not confirmed that an abnormal winning has occurred in the big winning opening. That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more, the abnormal winning notification process is terminated.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (the state where neither big hit game nor small hit game is played), the CPU 56 determines the value of bit 0 of the input port 0 (input bit of the detection signal from the counter switch 23). Whether or not has changed from 0 to 1 is checked (step S586). When the bit 7 or the bit 6 of the input port 0 changes from 0 to 1 (that is, when the counter switch 23 is turned on), the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning at the big winning opening has occurred, and the effect control board 80 Then, control for transmitting an abnormal winning notification designation command is performed (steps S586 and S587). In the big hit end process and the small hit end process shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the count switch detection time (the time from when the game ball is won to the big winning opening until it is detected by the count switch 23) has elapsed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is returned to zero. Therefore, the processing of steps S586 and S587 is not executed before the game ball has won the big winning opening but is not detected by the count switch 23. That is, the abnormal winning notification designation command is not transmitted even though the count switch 23 normally detects the game ball.

  When the counter switch 23 is turned on in the state where neither big hit game nor small hit game is performed by the above processing, an abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted. In addition, the process of steps S581 to S583 prohibits the start of abnormality notification when the effect control microcomputer 100 is performing initialization notification. The production control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the initialization notification.

  In this embodiment, the control for detecting and notifying the abnormal winning a prize winning opening is performed, but the abnormal winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 15 having the second start winning opening 14 is detected and notified. Control may also be performed (when the variable winning ball device 15 is open only when the second start winning port 14 is configured to be able to win). In this case, since the control state of the variable winning ball device 15 can be determined by the value of the normal symbol process flag, the CPU 56 does not indicate that the value of the normal symbol process flag indicates that the variable winning ball device 15 is open. An abnormal winning notification designation command is also transmitted when it is detected that the detection signal of the second start port switch 14a is turned on. It is preferable that the abnormal winning notification designation command is distinguishable from the abnormal winning notification designation command transmitted when an abnormal winning to the big winning opening is detected.

  For example, in the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 confirms the number of passages through the gate and determines whether or not to hit the normal symbol and determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol, normal symbol normal processing, various processes during the variation of the normal symbol A normal symbol change process for executing the normal symbol, a normal symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the normal symbol, and a normal electric accessory actuating process for controlling the opening / closing of the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) after the normal symbol is hit. Execute. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process flag is a value (for example, 3) corresponding to the normal electric actor operation process in the abnormal winning notification process, and the normal symbol process flag is the normal electric actor operation. When the value is other than the value corresponding to the processing, it may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on detecting that the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a is turned on.

  Next, the display area of the liquid crystal screen (display screen) in the effect display device 9 will be described. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing the display area of the liquid crystal screen in the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 43A, a substantially square effect symbol display area 91 for variably displaying the effect symbols is formed in the center of the circular liquid crystal screen (display screen) in the effect display device 9. The effect symbol display area 91 is arranged in such a direction that the direction of one diagonal of a substantially square is the vertical direction and the direction of the other diagonal is the horizontal direction. In this embodiment, the effect symbol display area 91 includes three variable display areas (variable display portions) capable of variably displaying the effect symbols.

  The area surrounded by the outer periphery (outer edge) of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the lower left side of the effect symbol display area 91 is the number display area 92. The number display area 92 displays information that can specify the total number of execution symbol temporary stop execution times and execution symbol derivation display execution times in a short time state (which may be a latent probability variation state). In the example shown in FIG. 43 (A), as information that can specify the total number of times, a specific number of times subtracted every time the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and the effect symbol derivation display is executed (the number of times that the short-time state can be continued: The remaining number of times from (100 times) is displayed. Specifically, immediately after the transition to the short-time state (immediately after the game of the non-probable big hit) is finished, “99 remaining times” is displayed in the number display area 92, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol and the derivation display of the effect symbol are performed. Each time it is played, the number is decreased by 1 until it reaches “0 times remaining”.

  The area surrounded by the outer periphery of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the lower right side of the effect symbol display area 91 is the summed hold storage display area 93. In the total pending storage display area 93, a maximum of eight total pending storage numbers are displayed.

  FIG. 43B shows a modification of the liquid crystal screen (display screen) in the effect display device 9. The liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 43A is formed in a circular shape, but the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 43B is formed in a square shape. The central part of the square liquid crystal screen is the effect symbol display area 91, the upper right oval area of the square liquid crystal screen is the number display area 92, and the lower part of the square liquid crystal screen is the lower part. This is the summed hold storage display area 93. In the following description (FIGS. 44 to 49), a display example of a square liquid crystal screen shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the information on the number of times displayed in the number of times display area 92 is obtained by specifying “the total number of times of the temporary stoppage of the decorative symbol and the number of times of the decorative symbol derivation display” As described later, in this embodiment, a predetermined update condition is satisfied in addition to the temporary stoppage or derivation display of decorative symbols (development to a specific super reach or a specific advance notice). The information on the number of times displayed in the number-of-times display area 92 is updated based on the fact that the production has occurred (see FIGS. 46 and 47). In this case, a deviation occurs between the number of times displayed in the number of times display area 92 and the total number of times. Therefore, strictly speaking, the information on the number of times displayed in the number of times display area 92 is information for indicating how many times the player will recognize that the time-short state continues (makes him / her think). However, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the information on the number of times displayed in the number display area 92 is described as “information for specifying the total number of times”.

  Next, a display example of the effect display device 9 and the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b) in the short-time state will be described.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the number of fluctuations in which the short-time state can be continued and information (remaining number of times) that can specify the total number of times. FIG. 44 shows the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the 7-segment LED of the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b) on the right side thereof. . As described above, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with the decorative symbol display area 91, the number of times display area 92, and the reserved storage display area 93 (not shown in FIG. 44). The arrow symbol on the display screen (effect symbol display area 91) of the effect display device 9 indicates that the effect symbols (left symbol 91a, middle symbol 91b, right symbol 91c) are changing. Moreover, the symbol of the arrow in a special symbol display has shown that the special symbol (a 1st special symbol or a 2nd special symbol) is changing. In addition, “−” in the special symbol display indicates a stop symbol of the special symbol which is “out of symbol”.

  FIG. 44 (a) shows the result that the temporary stop of the predetermined effect symbol and the derivation display of the predetermined effect symbol are executed after the transition to the short-time state, and as a result, “the remaining 91 times” is displayed as the remaining number of times in the frequency display area 92. Is displayed. At this time, the stop symbol “123” of the effect symbol and the stop symbol “−” of the special symbol are simultaneously derived and displayed.

  When the variation of the effect symbol and the variation of the special symbol are started at the same time, the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area 92 is updated and displayed (subtracted update display) as “remaining 90 times” (FIG. 44B). Then, the stop symbol “345” of the effect symbol and the stop symbol “−” of the special symbol are derived and displayed at the same time (FIG. 44 (c)), and once again the change of the effect symbol and the change of the special symbol are started simultaneously, The remaining number of times displayed in the number-of-times display area 92 is updated and displayed (subtracted update display) as “remaining 89 times” (FIG. 44D).

  If the variation of the newly started production symbol and special symbol is pseudo continuous variation (for example, non-reach PD 1-1 in FIG. 9), the production symbol is temporarily stopped at the temporary stop symbol “467”, but the special symbol is The fluctuation continues without temporarily stopping (FIG. 44 (e)). Then, when the change of the effect symbol after the temporary stop is executed, the remaining number displayed in the number display area 92 is updated and displayed as “remaining 88 times” (subtraction update display) (FIG. 44 (f)). . That is, the remaining number of times in the number display area 93 is updated and displayed also by the re-change after the temporary stop of the effect symbol during the pseudo continuous change.

  Here, the number of fluctuations of 100 times (the number of time reductions) in which the time-saving state can be continued is counted on the basis of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (see steps S139A to S139D in FIG. 39). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44 (e) and 44 (f), the display of the remaining number of times in the number display area 92 is updated and displayed even when re-change after the temporary stop of the effect symbol in the pseudo continuous change is performed. The As a result, there is a difference between the number of fluctuations in which the actual time saving state can be continued and the apparent remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area 92. On the other hand, the player cannot recognize that there is a difference between the number of fluctuations in which the actual time-saving state can be continued and the apparent number of times displayed in the number display area 92 (difficult to recognize). Is). The normal variation (non-reach PC1-1) of the staging pattern and the variation of one time of the pseudo continuous variation have the same variation time (3.8 seconds), and the variation mode of the staging pattern is also the same (rendering symbol) This is because the fluctuation speed gradually increases from the stop state of FIG. 6B, and after the high speed fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol gradually decreases and the effect symbol stops). In the above example, it is possible to determine whether the effect symbol is temporarily stopped or derived display depending on whether the special symbol is stopped when the effect symbol is stopped. The device is in a place where it is difficult to see, and the player is more aware of the variation in the production design than the special design, so it is difficult to notice.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that the effect symbol undergoes minute fluctuations in the temporary stop state of the effect symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 44, when the effect design is scrolled vertically, it is assumed that it is moving slightly in the vertical direction (vertical direction). Thus, even if a minute fluctuation is performed during the temporary stop of the effect design, as long as the fluctuation is small, it is difficult to visually distinguish the complete stop state. Therefore, the player cannot recognize that there is a difference between the number of fluctuations in which the actual time saving state can be continued and the apparent number of times displayed in the number display area 92 (difficult to recognize). Is). In addition, the fluctuation fluctuation of the effect design is not limited to the fluctuation in the same direction as the scroll direction, and may be a fluctuation in a different direction. Further, the fluctuation fluctuation may not be performed during the temporary stop of the effect symbol.

  After the effect symbol is re-varied after a temporary stop for a predetermined time, the effect symbol is derived and displayed (FIG. 44 (g)). Then, when the variation of the production symbol and the variation of the special symbol are started, the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area 92 is updated and displayed (subtracted update display) as “remaining 87 times” (FIG. 44 (h)). . When such fluctuating operation and the update display of the remaining number of times are repeatedly executed, the remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area 92 becomes “1 time remaining (FIG. 44 (i)). Further, when the variation of the production symbol and the variation of the special symbol are started, the remaining number displayed in the number display area 92 is updated and displayed (subtracted update display) as “remaining 0 times” (FIG. 44 (j)). . Then, when the stop symbol of the effect symbol and the stop symbol of the special symbol are derived and displayed (FIG. 44 (k)), the number of fluctuations (for example, the remaining five times) in which the actual time-saving state can be continued and the number display area 92 are displayed. If there is a difference between the displayed remaining number of times (0 remaining), the player is informed that the time reduction state has been extended, and transitions to the time reduction extension state (FIG. 44 ( l)). Such effect control corresponds to executing an effect that makes it appear as if the time-short state has ended despite the fact that the time-short state has not ended, and then extends the time-short state. In the example shown in FIG. 44 (l), “EXTRA Dream Dream TIME!” Is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and a girl character appears to extend the time reduction state (to the time reduction extension state). It has been reported that it has entered.

  According to such a configuration, even after the information (remaining number of times) that can specify the total number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times, that is, the remaining number of times), the time reduction state may be continued. It is possible to improve the fun of gaming.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the number of fluctuations in which the short-time state can be continued and information (number of executions) that can specify the total number of times. In the example shown in FIG. 44, as information that can specify the total number of times to be displayed in the number display area 92, a specific number of times (time reduction state continues to be subtracted every time the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and the effect symbol derivation display is executed. The remaining number of times from the possible number of times: 100 was displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 45, a specific number of times (shortening state can be continued each time the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and the effect symbol derivation display is executed. The number of executions of the temporary stop of the effect symbol and the derivation display of the effect symbol, which are added up to 100 times) are displayed. That is, the total number of execution times of the temporary stop of the effect symbol and the execution frequency of the derivation display of the effect symbol is directly displayed as the execution number.

  FIG. 45 (a) shows that the number of execution times is “49” in the number-of-times display area 92 as a result of the temporary stop of a predetermined number of effect symbols and the derivation display of the predetermined number of effect symbols after the transition to the short-time state. It is in the displayed state. At this time, the stop symbol “123” of the effect symbol and the stop symbol “−” of the special symbol are simultaneously derived and displayed.

  When the variation of the effect symbol and the variation of the special symbol are started at the same time, the number of executions displayed in the number display area 92 is updated and displayed (additional update display) as “50 times” (FIG. 45B). Then, the stop symbol “345” of the effect symbol and the stop symbol “−” of the special symbol are simultaneously derived and displayed (FIG. 45 (c)), and once again, the change of the effect symbol and the change of the special symbol are started simultaneously, The number of executions displayed in the number display area 92 is updated and displayed as “51” (additional update display) (FIG. 45D).

  If the variation of the newly started production symbol and special symbol is pseudo continuous variation (for example, non-reach PD 1-1 in FIG. 9), the production symbol is temporarily stopped at the temporary stop symbol “467”, but the special symbol is The fluctuation continues without temporarily stopping (FIG. 45 (e)). When the re-change after the temporary stop of the effect symbol is executed, the number of executions displayed in the number display area 92 is updated to “52” (additional update display) (FIG. 45 (f)). That is, the number of executions of the number display area 93 is updated and displayed also by the re-change after the temporary stop of the effect symbol during the pseudo continuous change. At this time, as in the case described with reference to FIG. 44, a difference is generated between the number of fluctuations in which the actual time-saving state can be continued and the apparent number of executions displayed in the number display area 92.

  After the effect symbol is re-varied after the temporary stop for a predetermined time, the effect symbol is derived and displayed (FIG. 45 (g)). When the variation of the effect symbol and the variation of the special symbol are started, the number of executions displayed in the number display area 92 is updated and displayed (additional update display) as “53 times” (FIG. 45 (h)). When such an update display of the variable operation and the number of executions is repeatedly executed, the number of executions displayed in the number display area 92 becomes “100 times” (when the update display is performed from the number of executions once). After that, when the stop symbol of the production symbol and the stop symbol of the special symbol are derived and displayed, the number of fluctuations (for example, 95 times) in which the actual time-saving state can be continued and the visual execution displayed in the frequency display area 92 are performed. If there is a difference between the number of times (100 times), the player is notified that the time-short state has been extended, and the time-shifted state is entered. Even with such a configuration, as in the case shown in FIG. 44, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example when the short time state is extended based on a specific super reach. 46 (a) to 46 (g) are the same as the screen display examples in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (g) described above, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  When the change of the design symbol and the special symbol of the “50th remaining” are started (FIG. 46H), the change pattern is a specific super reach change pattern (for example, a super reach in which a girl character appears). Fluctuation pattern). In a specific super reach variation pattern, for example, after a normal variation is performed, a super reach variation (production) is developed. At this time, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is informed of the development to super reach, and the predetermined number of times is added to the remaining number of times that is information that can specify the total number of times (the remaining number of times increases). Inform. That is, it notifies that the temporary stop of the effect symbol or the derivation display of the effect symbol is extended a predetermined number of times. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (h), a girl character appears and displays “Super development + 2P!” On the screen to notify that the remaining number is increased twice.

  Thereafter, the remaining number displayed in the number display area 92 is updated from “50 remaining” to “52 remaining” (additional update display) (FIG. 46 (i)). A special symbol stop symbol “-” is derived and displayed (FIG. 46J). At this time, the number of fluctuations in which the actual time reduction state can be continued (time reduction number) is not added by a predetermined number of times, and the time reduction state is not extended, but the apparent remaining number of times displayed in the number display area 92 is predetermined. The number of times is added to produce an appearance that makes it appear as if the short-time state has been extended. For example, when the remaining number of times that the actual time-saving state can continue is 55, for example, and the remaining number of appearances displayed in the number display area 92 is 50, the predetermined number of times (2 times) ) Is added and updated and displayed for the remaining 52 times, but the number of fluctuations in which the time-saving state can be continued remains 55 times. In this case, the difference between the number of times of change and the remaining number of times is only 3, and there is no problem in game control.

  When the variation of the design symbol and the special symbol of the “0th remaining” are completed (FIG. 46 (k)), the number of variations (for example, the remaining three times) and the number display area 92 in which the actual time-saving state can continue If there is a difference between the remaining number of times (0 remaining) displayed on the screen, as in the case shown in FIG. Notification is made, and the state shifts to the time extension state (FIG. 46 (l)).

  According to the above configuration, the player can expect a big hit by developing to a specific super reach, and even if a big hit does not occur based on the specific super reach, a predetermined number of times can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the short-time state is extended. As a result, the interest of the game is improved and the disappointment of the player can be reduced.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example when the short time state is extended based on a specific notice effect. When the change of the “50th remaining” effect design and the change of the special design are started (FIG. 47A), a specific notice effect (for example, a notice effect in which a girl character appears) is given during the change. When executed, it is determined by the CPU 101 for effect control. In a specific notice effect, for example, a girl character appears during normal fluctuation, and notices the occurrence of a reach (it may be a big hit) (FIG. 47 (b)). At this time, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is notified that the predetermined number of times is added to the remaining number of times that can specify the total number of times (the remaining number increases). That is, it notifies that the temporary stop of the effect symbol or the derivation display of the effect symbol is extended a predetermined number of times. In the example shown in FIG. 47 (b), a girl character appears and displays “notice + 2P!” On the screen to notify that the remaining number will increase twice.

  Thereafter, the remaining number displayed in the number display area 92 is updated from “50 remaining” to “52 remaining” (additional update display) (FIG. 47 (c)), and develops into a reach state (FIG. 47 ( d)). Then, the stop symbol “767” of the effect symbol is derived and displayed (FIG. 47E). Similarly to the above, the number of fluctuations that can be continued in the actual time reduction state (number of time reductions) is not increased by a predetermined number of times, and the time reduction state is not extended, but the remaining number of appearances displayed in the number display area 92 Is added for a predetermined number of times, and the appearance is made to appear as if the short-time state is extended. For example, when the remaining number of times that the actual time-saving state can continue is 55, for example, and the remaining number of appearances displayed in the number display area 92 is 50, the predetermined number of times (2 times) ) Is added and updated and displayed for the remaining 52 times, but the number of fluctuations in which the time-saving state can be continued remains 55 times. In this case, the difference between the number of times of change and the remaining number of times is only 3, and there is no problem in game control.

  In addition, although not shown in FIG. 47, when the variation of the “0th remaining” effect symbol and the variation of the special symbol are finished, the actual number of times that the shortened state can be continued (for example, the remaining three times) If there is a difference between the apparent remaining number displayed in the number display area 92 (the remaining number is 0), the player is informed that the time reduction state has been extended, and transitions to the time reduction extension state. To do.

  Even with the above-described configuration, it is possible to expect the player to win a big hit by the occurrence of a specific notice effect, and even if the big hit does not occur based on the specific notice effect, the time is shortened by a predetermined number of times. As a result, the interest of the game is improved and the disappointment of the player can be reduced.

  In addition, it is not limited to the extension of time reduction (addition of the remaining number of times) triggered by the development of super reach or the occurrence of a notice effect, but it suddenly appears at the start of fluctuation, and at that time, the predetermined number of times is added to the remaining number May be informed that the remaining number of times is to be increased.

  46 and 47 show the case where the remaining number of subtractions is displayed each time the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and the effect symbol derivation display is performed, the same as the case shown in FIG. In addition, even when displaying the number of executions that are added each time a temporary stop of the production symbol and the derivation display of the production symbol are performed, the number of executions is a predetermined number of times based on a specific super reach or a specific notice production. You may make it look like the time-short state is extended by subtracting.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, when an effect is made such that the short-time state is apparently extended based on a specific super reach, the short-time state is displayed in the number-of-times display area 92 rather than the remaining number of changes that can be continued. The remaining number of times may increase. In this case, although the remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area 92 has not reached zero, the time-short state ends, which may give the player a sense of incongruity. In this case, when a specific super reach or a specific notice effect occurs frequently, and the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area 92 is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations in which the short-time state can be continued, A means for forcibly reducing the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area 92 may be taken. For example, when the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area 92 is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations in which the short-time state can be continued, a special effect is performed to forcibly reduce the remaining number of times (girl character The remaining number of times may be gradually or once reduced). By executing such an effect, the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area 92 can be forcibly adjusted.

  In addition, it is not limited to the case where the predetermined number is added to the remaining number in response to the occurrence of the super reach or the notice effect, but suddenly appears at the start of the fluctuation, and at that time, the predetermined number is added to the remaining number (the remaining number is Increase)) may be notified.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of information that can specify the total number of times in the number display area. 44, 46, and 47, “remaining XX times” is displayed as information that can specify the total number of times in the number display area 92. In FIG. 45, information that can specify the total number of times in the number display area 92 is displayed. Although “XX times” is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) to 48 (c), it may be displayed using a “positive” character. That is, in the number display area 92, information indicating the total number of times may be displayed by displaying the number of times “5” with one “positive” character.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 48D to 48F, information that can specify the total number of times is displayed at the position of the car 92A between “start” and “end” in the number display area 92. Also good. That is, the car 92A is in the “start” position when the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state, and the position of the car 92A is brought closer to “end” whenever there is a temporary stop of the effect symbol and a derivation display of the effect symbol. It may be. Note that information that can specify the total number of times (remaining number of times) may be difficult to recognize with only the car 92A, and therefore, a scale that moves from “start” to “end” may be moved together with the car 92A.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 48G to 48I, information that can specify the total number of times by the number of large flowers 92B and small flowers 92C in the number display area 92 may be displayed. That is, the number of times “10” may be displayed with one large flower, and the number of times “1” may be displayed with one small flower. In addition, it is also possible to display information that can specify the total number of times according to the effect and the character image as appropriate.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing another modified example of information that can specify the total number of times in the number display area. As shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), in the frequency display area 92, when the state is shifted to the short-time state, a girl character appears, and the lottery that the girl character is in the bin is displayed as a temporary design symbol. Draw one by one according to the stop and production symbol derivation display. The number of lotteries (number) in the bin is the remaining number of times (information for specifying the total number of times). In addition, the production design fluctuates in the lower right corner of the screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), when a specific super reach occurs but does not result in a big hit, “3 lottery tickets” are added to the bin as a disappointing prize. Thereby, the remaining number of times is added. Thereafter, the temporary stop of the effect symbol and the derivation display of the effect symbol are repeatedly performed, thereby eliminating the lottery in the bin. Then, when the stop symbol of the effect symbol and the stop symbol of the special symbol are derived and displayed, the number of fluctuations (for example, the remaining five times) in which the actual time-saving state can be continued and the appearance displayed in the frequency display area 92 are displayed. If there is a difference between the remaining number of times (remaining 0 times; the remaining number of lotteries is 0), the player is informed that the short-time state has been extended, as shown in FIG. Then, it shifts to the time extension state. Note that information that can specify the total number of times (remaining number of times) may be difficult to recognize only by the number of lotteries, so a scale that moves along with the update of information that can specify the total number of times may be provided.

  Note that the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 include fluctuations of “pseudo continuous fluctuation” of non-reach PD 1-1 to non-reach PD 1-6 as a fluctuation pattern of “pseudo continuous fluctuation (2 to 4 times)”. In addition to the pattern, there is also provided a “pseudo continuous variation (chance)” variation pattern such as non-reach PA1-5. However, in this embodiment, information that can specify the total number of times is not updated and displayed based on the temporary stop (temporary stop of chance) in the variation pattern of “pseudo continuous fluctuation (chance eye)”. . In this case, however, information that can specify the total number of times may be updated and displayed.

  In addition, although said FIG.44-FIG.49 showed the example of an effect display in a time-short state, the same effect display is performed also in a latent probability change state. However, after the transition to the short-time extension state, in the case of the short-time state, the short-time extension state ends when the actual number of fluctuations that can be continued is reached. The time extension continues until it occurs.

  Next, the random numbers updated by the production control microcomputer 100 (production control CPU 101) will be described.

  On the effect control board 80, numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation are counted in an updatable manner. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 50, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 80, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbols for promotion effect determination Random value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance, random values SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, for determining the promotion effect execution Random number SR5, random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns, random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type, and random values for determining the first to third sub-notice patterns Numerical data indicating each of SR8-1 to SR8-3 and the random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The production control CPU 101 uses these random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3, Any numerical value data indicating all or part of SR9 may be used.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9 as the determined effect symbols that are variable display results of the effect symbols. ”Is a random value used to determine the effect symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each symbol display area. Here, the final stop symbols are three effect symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas when the variable display of the effect symbols ends. That is. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  In this embodiment, the random values for determining the first to third final stop symbols also for the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo continuous variation (2 to 4 times; non-reach PD1-1 to non-reach PD1-6). It is determined using SR1-1 to SR1-3. The temporary stop symbols here are three effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas from the start to the end of variable display of the special symbols. That is. However, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo continuous variation (2 to 4 times; non-reach PD1-1 to non-reach PD1-6) is changed to random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols. It may be determined using another random number other than. In this case, in order not to temporarily stop display the same outcome (combination of symbols) as the chance stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol, if the determined temporary stop symbol is the chance symbol, a predetermined process is performed (for example, a random number) Based on this, change the symbol of “Left”, “Middle”, or “Right”, or shift the symbol of “Left”, “Middle”, or “Right” by a predetermined symbol difference). It is desirable to do. In addition, in order not to display the temporary stop symbol for the combination of symbols that are in the reach state as the temporary stop symbol (the combination of symbols in which the left and right symbols are the same symbol), If it is a combination, a predetermined process is performed (for example, “left” or “right” is changed based on a random number, or “left” or “right” is changed by a predetermined symbol difference. It is desirable to do so. The temporary stop symbol can be any combination of symbols as long as it is a combination of symbols that do not reach the reach state.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol during the promotion effect is a normal jackpot combination for temporarily stopping display in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas when executing the changing promotion effect. Is a random value used for determining the decorative pattern of, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance is “left”, “middle”, This is a random value used for determining the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” effect symbol display area, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random number value used to determine the combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each effect symbol display area as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is the promotion effect during the change when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Or a random number value used to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns correspond to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “main notice”. It is a random value used to determine the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types. As an example, the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and values in the range of “1” to “150” are used. Take. The random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, and values in the range of “1” to “60” are used. Take.

  The random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type determines whether or not to execute the sub-notice effect, and determines the sub-notice pattern type when executing the sub-notice effect to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. This is a random value used for this purpose, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random values SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third sub-notice patterns are random values used for determining one of a plurality of types of sub-notice patterns prepared in advance. As an example, the random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern is used to determine the sub-notice pattern in the sub-notice effect of “character display” and has a value in the range of “1” to “499”. Take. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern is used to determine a sub-notice pattern in the sub-notice effect of the “step-up image”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random number SR8-3 for determining the third sub-notice pattern is used to determine a sub-notice pattern in the “mail display” sub-notice effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  The ROM mounted on the effect control board 80 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation, in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a final stop shown in FIGS. 51 (A) to (D) is used as a table for determining a definite production symbol that is one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chances HC1 to HC8. Symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 51A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 51 (B) is a final final stop symbol that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes a random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 51C is a medium final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like.

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 52. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. 3 is made up of determination data assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that are the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 51 (B), the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the combination of the finalized design is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the chances of success TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 51C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 2A, the portion that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The random final value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is set in the portion that becomes the odd chance TC1 to TC4 shown in 2 (C), and further in the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance HC1 to HC8, or a random chance TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 51 (D) shows the final display in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas when the specific effect “end of development chance” is executed. Based on the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, the combination of the definitive effect symbols that become the stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 is determined as one of the development chances HC1 to HC8. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, for example, as tables for determining a definite effect symbol to be a reach-losing combination. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 54A is a left final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area among the finalized symbol patterns that are the reach-losing combination. 1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area, are determined based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A has a rendering symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. -1 and FZ2-2), the data for determination to be assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 54 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area among the finalized effect symbols that are reach-losing combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value from the symbol number of the effect symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The In other words, in the variable display of effect symbols, the effect symbols start to change in the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the finalized design symbol that is the variable display result of the production symbol is stopped, the “left” and “right” production symbol display areas other than the “medium” production symbol display area where the production symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to stop in the “medium” effect symbol display area. The difference (design difference) between the displayed middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a definite effect symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-1 to PB3-5, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, depending on the case of any one of the fluctuation patterns of 5 to super PA3-8. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to “+2”.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 55A to 55C is used as a table for determining a definite effect symbol to be one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. 163A to 163C are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 55 (A) is a left middle that is stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas as a confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 55 (B) is a left middle that is stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas as a confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 55 (C) has a left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4-2, FZ4- in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. 3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined effect symbols of 3 as one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A and 164B shown in FIGS. 56A and 56B as tables for determining any one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. Yes. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 56 (A) slides the specific effect pattern TP1 based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern when the “slip” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special A random value SR6- for determining the first specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 9 and 10) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a change pattern of PG2-2 and special PG3-3. 1 is composed of data for determination assigned to the specific production patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. .

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right”, the “left” and “right” effects are produced. After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, the effect symbol is displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area by rapidly changing the effect symbol again in the “right” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at, the effect symbol display area of “Left” is re-fluctuated at a high speed, and then the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the “Left” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at, the effect symbol display area of “RIGHT” is re-varied to a low speed and then stopped and displayed in the “RIGHT” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas are displayed. After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at, the effect symbol display area of “Left” is re-fluctuated at a low speed, and then the effect is stopped and displayed in the “Left” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 56B is specified based on the random number value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous (chance eyes)” is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine the production pattern as one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super A random value SR6 for determining the second specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 9 and 10) in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, such as a change pattern of PF1-1 and special PG1-3. -2 is made up of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, and then re-variation (pseudo-variation). The all-revariation display operation to be performed is performed once before the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the all-revariable display operation is performed twice before the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by determining the specific effect pattern to any one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 using the specific effect pattern determination table 164B, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is determined. be able to.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM includes a specific effect pattern determination table for selecting and determining a specific effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice”. Yes. As an example of a table for determining a specific effect pattern when a specific effect of “main notice” is executed, specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E as shown in FIGS. As long as it is stored. The specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E shown in FIGS. 57A to 57C are based on the random number value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed. , Specific notice patterns are main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, main notice TP3-2-2, main notice TP3-3-1, main notice TP3-3. -2 is a table referred to in order to select and determine from -2. Each of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E is used as a use table according to the value of the main notice table designation buffer (main notice table designation buffer value) according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 57D, for example. Specified and set. The specific performance pattern determination tables 164C to 164E are respectively non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4- 3. Random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 9 and 10) in which the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, such as the change pattern of the super PB 5-3. Main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, main notice TP3-2-2, main notice TP3-3-1, main notice TP3-3-2 It consists of data for selection assigned to a specific performance pattern. Each of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E has a main notice table designation buffer value corresponding to the specific effect pattern determined based on the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern. Table data (update data) indicating the main notice table designation buffer update setting value for updating to any one of “1” to “3” is included.

  Here, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 57A is specified and set as a use table when the main notice table designation buffer value is “1”, and the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6. In this case, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is selected so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice TP3-3-1. Data for selection to assign is set. On the other hand, in the specific effect pattern determination table 164C, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1 cannot be selected and determined. When the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-2-1, the next notice of the “main notice” is executed by updating the main notice table designation buffer value to “2”. At the time of selecting the specific effect pattern for the purpose, the specific effect pattern determination table 164D is specified and set as the use table. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-3-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “3”, thereby specifying the next “main notice”. When selecting a specific effect pattern for executing an effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164E is specified and set as a use table.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164D shown in FIG. 57B is selected and selected as a use table when the main notice table designation buffer value is “2”, and the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6. The selection of assigning the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-3-1. Data is set. On the other hand, in the specific effect pattern determination table 164D, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-2-1 cannot be selected and determined. When the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-1-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “1”, thereby executing the next effect of “main notice”. At the time of selecting a specific effect pattern to be performed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C is specified and set as a use table. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-3-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “3”, thereby specifying the next “main notice”. When selecting a specific effect pattern for executing an effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164E is specified and set as a use table.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164E shown in FIG. 57C is specified and set as a use table when the main notice table designation buffer value is “3”, and the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6. The selection of assigning the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-2-1. Data is set. On the other hand, in the specific effect pattern determination table 164E, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-3-1 cannot be selected and determined. When the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-1-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “1”, thereby executing the next effect of “main notice”. At the time of selecting a specific effect pattern to be performed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C is specified and set as a use table. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-2-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “2”, thereby specifying the next “main notice”. When selecting a specific effect pattern for executing an effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164D is specified and set as a use table.

  Thus, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, if the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1 is selected using any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164D and 164E, the main notice use When the table designation buffer value is updated to “1” and the specific effect pattern for executing the next “main notice” specific effect is selected, if the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice TP3 selected this time is selected. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C in which the table data is configured so that the specific effect pattern of 1-1 cannot be selected is specified and set as the use table. If the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-2-1 is selected using any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C and 164E when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice table When the specified buffer value is updated to “2” and the specific effect pattern for executing the specific effect of the next “main notice” is selected, if the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice TP3 selected this time is selected. The specific effect pattern determination table 164D in which the table data is configured so that the 2-1 specific effect pattern cannot be selected is specified and set as the use table. Further, when the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-3-1 is selected using any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C and 164D when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice table When the specified buffer value is updated to “3” and the specific effect pattern for executing the next specific effect of “main notice” is selected, if the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice TP3 selected this time is selected. The specific effect pattern determination table 164E in which the table data is configured so that the 3-1 specific effect pattern cannot be selected is specified and set as the use table. As described above, the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E each include selection data set so as not to select the specific effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” to be executed this time. It is configured as follows.

  In addition, in the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is Super PA3-3, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1-2. When the variation pattern is Super PA3-7, the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main announcement TP3-2-1 and the main announcement TP3-2-2, and the variation pattern is super PB3- 3, a random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is selected so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2. Data for selection to assign is set. Here, the variation patterns of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, and Super PB3-3 are all corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “lost”. As shown in FIG. 9, the reach effect α1 is executed if the change pattern is super PA3-3, and the reach effect α2 is executed if the change pattern is super PA3-7. If it is a variation pattern of the super PB3-3, the reach effect β1 is executed.

  According to such settings of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variable display result is “losing”, the change pattern is a change pattern of the super PA 3-3 for executing the reach effect α1. The specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1-2, and the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” is selected from the effect operations associated with the reach effect α1. Will be. In addition, when the variable display result is “losing”, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern of the super PA 3-7 for executing the reach effect α2, the specific effect pattern is the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice. The effect operation in the specific effect of “main notice” is selected from the effect operations selected from TP3-2-2 and associated with the reach effect α2. Furthermore, when the variable display result is “losing”, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern of the super PB 3-3 for executing the reach effect β1, the specific effect pattern is the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice. The effect operation in the specific effect “main notice” is selected from the effect operations selected from TP3-3-2 and associated with the reach effect β1.

  Further, in the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-3, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1-2. Although the ratio to be determined is high, it is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-2-1, the main notice TP3-2-2, the main notice TP3-3-1, and the main notice TP3-3-2. For this purpose, selection data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set. In the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-7 or Super PA 5-3, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice TP3-2-2. Although it is selected and determined at a high rate, it is also selected from the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-3-1, and main notice TP3-3-2. Selection data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set so that it can be determined. In the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is Super PB4-3 or Super PB5-3, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2. Although it is selected and determined at a high rate, it is also selected from the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice TP3-2-2. Determination data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set so that it can be determined.

  Here, all of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, and Super PB5-3 are prepared corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. Variation pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 10, if the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3, the reach effect α1 is executed, and if the variation pattern of the super PA 4-7, the reach effect α2 is executed, and the variation pattern of the super PA 5-3. If this is the case, the reach effect α3 is executed, if the change pattern is the super PB4-3, the reach effect β1 is executed, and if the change pattern is the super PB5-3, the reach effect β2 is executed.

  According to such settings of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the change pattern is the change pattern of the super PA 4-3 for executing the reach effect α1. When the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1-2, the effect in the specific effect of the “main notice” from among the effect operations associated with the reach effect α1. While the action is selected, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-2-1, the main notice TP3-2-2, the main notice TP3-3-1, and the main notice TP3-3-2. There is also an effect that can be selected for the specific effect of the “main notice” from the effects that are not associated with the reach effect α1. . Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern may be a variation pattern of the super PA 4-7 for executing the reach effect α2 or a variation pattern of the super PA 5-3 for executing the reach effect α3. For example, when the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice TP3-2-2, the specific effect of the “main notice” is selected from among the action operations associated with the reach effect α2. While the effect operation is selected, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-3-1, and main notice TP3-3-2. In other cases, it is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of the “main notice” from among the effect operations not associated with the reach effect α2.Here, by configuring the reach effect α3 to include the effect operation in the reach effect α2, the effect operation associated with the reach effect α2 becomes the effect operation associated with the reach effect α3. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern may be the variation pattern of the super PB 4-3 for executing the reach effect β1 or the variation pattern of the super PB 5-3 for executing the reach effect β2. For example, when the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2, the specific action of the “main notice” is selected from among the action operations associated with the reach effect β1. While the effect operation is selected, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice TP3-2-2. In other cases, it is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of the “main notice” from among the effect operations not associated with the reach effect β1. . Here, by configuring the reach effect β2 to include the effect operation in the reach effect β1, the effect operation associated with the reach effect β1 becomes the effect operation associated with the reach effect β2.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” by the setting of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, the reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 executed according to the variation pattern. It is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of “main notice” from a plurality of types including effect operations not associated with each. However, the production operations associated with each of the reach production α1 to reach production α3 and the reach production β1 to reach production β3 according to the variation pattern are “main notice” compared to the production operations that are not associated with each other. The ratio selected as the rendering operation in the specific rendering becomes high.

  In the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice are included in the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2. Compared to the specific effect patterns of TP3-2-1 and main notice TP3-3-1, the variation pattern when the variable display result is “big hit” rather than the variation pattern when the variable display result is “losing” More random number values SR6-3 for determining the third specific performance pattern are assigned. As an example, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-2 includes a range of “41” to “60” corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA3-3 used when the variable display result is “lost”. Is assigned, while a value in the range of “21” to “50” is assigned corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 used when the variable display result is “big hit”. . On the other hand, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1 is assigned a value in the range of “1” to “40” corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA3-3, Values “1” to “20” are assigned corresponding to the variation pattern of PA4-3. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1 may be selected, while the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-2 is selected. It will never be done. By such setting of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, effect operations corresponding to the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 are performed. In this case, a variable display result is obtained as compared with a case where an effect operation corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice TP3-3-1 is performed. The possibility of a “hit” (big hit reliability) increases.

  In any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 The selection data is set so that the specific production pattern is not selected. By such setting of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, effect operations corresponding to the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 are performed. In this case, the player can recognize that the variable display state of the effect symbol is the reach state.

  As another example of the table for determining the specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, a specific effect pattern determination table 164F as shown in FIG. 58 may be stored in the ROM. The specific effect pattern determination table 164F shown in FIG. 58 includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4. −3, the random value SR6- for determining the third specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 9 and 10) in which the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, such as the change pattern of the super PB 5-3. 3, main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, main notice TP3-2-2, main notice TP3-3-1, main notice TP3-3-2 Data for selection to be assigned to the specific production pattern.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern determination table 164F shown in FIG. 58, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, the specific effect pattern is the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice. Selection data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set so as to be selected and determined from TP3-3-1. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern is one of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3. In the case of, selection data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined in the same manner as the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E. Has been. As a result, when the variable display result is “losing”, the “main notice” is selected from the production operations associated with the reach production α1, the reach production α2, and the reach production β1 that are executed according to the variation pattern. The production operation in the specific production is selected. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, a plurality of effect operations that are not associated with each of reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 executed according to the variation pattern. From the types, it is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of “main notice”.

  According to the settings of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E or the specific effect pattern determination table 164F, one of a plurality of types of reach effects such as reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 is executed. In this case, it is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of “main notice” from a plurality of types at a different rate depending on the type of reach effect.

  Also in the specific effect pattern determination table 164F, the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3 are included in the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2. 2-1 Compared with the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-3-1, the variation pattern when the variable display result is “big hit” than the variation pattern when the variable display result is “losing” However, more random number values SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern are assigned. In the case where an effect operation corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 is performed by the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164F. In this case, the big hit reliability is higher than that in the case where the production operation corresponding to the specific production pattern of the main announcement TP3-1-1, the main announcement TP3-2-1, and the main announcement TP3-3-1 is performed. . In the specific effect pattern determination table 164F, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2. The selection data is set so that is not selected. In the case where an effect operation corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 is performed by the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164F. In this case, the player can recognize that the variable display state of the effect symbol is the reach state.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 59A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 59B. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 59A, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A, the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is changing depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, among the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution, the value in the range of “1” to “99” has the promotion effect during the change. The value of “100” is assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change. In this case, if the determination result is that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion failure effect is executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, among the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution, the value in the range of “1” to “70” is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect. The value in the range of “71” to “100” is assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change. In this case, if the determination result is that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change, and the promotion success during the change and the change promotion during the change Any failure production will not be executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 59 (B), the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, it is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “third probability change”, and determines the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 as a jackpot. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion success production or a big hit promotion promotion production. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result with the jackpot promotion promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. It will be. When the jackpot type is “first probability change” or “second probability change”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the jackpot promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion Both the successful performance and the jackpot promotion failure production will not be executed. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Assigned to the decision result. In this case, depending on the determination result, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect is executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, temporary stop symbols shown in FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (D) are used as tables for determining the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Decision tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development chance temporary according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the effect symbol display area where the decorative symbols are changed again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped. In other words, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In response to “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol which becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C shows the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is a symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4. Contains decision data to allocate.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, temporary tables shown in FIGS. 61 (A) to 61 (D) are used as tables for determining decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4. Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the operation is performed. Here, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, and the temporary stop symbol one time before that Becomes “1” in the variation of the effect symbol in which the stop display is displayed (pseudo continuous variation), and becomes “2” in the variation of the effect symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is displayed twice before (pseudo continuous variation). By the time of execution of the pseudo continuous variation in which the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all revariable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area, and the temporary stop display in the “right” effect symbol display area The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area, are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. When the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. Left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area, and right temporary stop symbol KZ2-, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area. 2. It is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-8, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 4-4, Super PB 5-4, Super PF1. -1 and special PG1-3, when the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is "2" In addition, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area, and the right temporary stop symbol, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area. KZ3-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that becomes the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "medium" effect symbol display area. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. If the remaining number of re-variation display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the “left” production Left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the symbol display area, right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" effect symbol display area, "middle" Is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the stop display is performed only once, there is no need to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after displaying the symbol temporarily stopped is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 61 (A) and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 61 (B) are left final stop symbols as final stop symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols, the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2-. 3 is composed of data for determination assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 constituted by a combination of three. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 61C is determined by using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol 2-3. The random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3-2 depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ3-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 61 (D) includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining temporary stop symbols using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. Depending on the number of executions of the change, any one of the pseudo-chance chances GC1 to GC8 is used as a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in all the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Can be determined.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 63 is used as a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “development chance” specific effect is executed. include. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shows the chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. Yes.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 64 as a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left middle right final stop symbol FZ3- displayed as a stop effect in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas as a definite effect symbol that is a jackpot combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols which are 1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3, the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ7-1. , KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are made up of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes a sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of sub-notice pattern types based on the random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type. The sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 is a non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. In the case of non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super In the case of any one of PA5-3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, and super PB5-3, the random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type is determined depending on the variation pattern other than these variation patterns. For sub-notice or sub-notice CY1 to CY3 sub-notice pattern types, etc. It is configured.

  Here, in the sub-notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3. Corresponding to the variation pattern (see FIGS. 9 and 10) in which a specific effect of “main notice” is executed, such as Super PB4-3 and Super PB5-3, All numerical values SR7 are assigned without sub-notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, the execution of the effect operation as the sub notice effect is limited. Here, in the specific effect of “Main notice”, the effect of the specific effect is started within a short period of time after the decorative symbol changes are started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. When the display is started and the sub notice effect is performed, the execution period is overlapped. Therefore, in the sub-notice pattern type determination table 170, the random value SR7 for determining the sub-notice pattern type is assigned so that there is always no sub-notice when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed. Thus, it is possible not to execute the sub-notice effect whose execution period overlaps with the specific effect of the “main notice”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, sub-notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 66 to 68 as tables for determining any of a plurality of types of sub-notice patterns. When the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice pattern CY1, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171A has no sub-notice or sub-notice pattern based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the notice YP1-1 to the sub notice YP1-4. The sub-notice pattern determination table 171A sets the random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern according to the variation pattern without sub-notice or sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP1-1 to sub-notice YP1-4. It consists of data for decision to be assigned to.

  Here, in the sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP1-1 to sub-notice YP1-4, effect display in the sub-notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the sub-notice effect of “character display”, character images corresponding to the sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP1-1 to sub-notice YP1-4 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  When the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice CY2, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171B has no sub-notice or sub-notice pattern based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern. This table is referred to in order to determine one of the advance notice YP2-1 to the sub advance notice YP2-4. The sub-notice pattern determination table 171B sets the second sub-notice pattern determination random number SR8-2 to the sub-notice pattern of sub-notice YP2-1 to sub-notice YP2-4 according to the variation pattern. It consists of data for decision to be assigned to.

  Here, in the sub-notice patterns SUB2-1 to YP2-4, the effect display in the sub-notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the sub-notice effect of “step-up image”, any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and each of sub-notice YP2-1 to sub-notice YP2-4 is displayed. Corresponding to the sub-notice pattern, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed in a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  When the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice CY3, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C has no sub-notice or sub-notice pattern based on the random number SR8-3 for determining the third sub-notice pattern. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the notice YP3-1 to the sub notice YP3-3. The sub-notice pattern determination table 171C uses the sub-notice pattern of the sub-notice YP3-1 to the sub-notice YP3-3 for the third sub-notice pattern determination random value SR8-3 according to the variation pattern. It consists of data for decision to be assigned to.

  Here, in the sub-notice patterns of sub-notice YP3-1 to sub-notice YP3-3, the effect display in the sub-notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” sub-notice effect, an effect image prompting the operation of the operation button 120 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and then the sub-notice YP3-1 is executed in response to the operation button 120 being operated. While displaying the effect image corresponding to each sub-notice pattern of the sub-notice YP3-3, if the operation button 120 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each sub-notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the sub-notice effect of “mail display”, the effect operation changes according to the operation button 120 being operated.

  In the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 68, the random value SR8 for determining the third sub-notice pattern corresponding to the variation patterns of the non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. A value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned without sub-notice. On the other hand, in response to the variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variable display state is the reach state, a smaller number of random values SR8-3 than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 are sub-notices. Assigned to none. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without sub-notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. In other variation patterns that reach the reach state, a random value SR8 for determining the third sub-notice pattern is determined depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super). -3 assignment is different. On the other hand, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed. , A larger number of random values SR8-3 than the variation pattern of PA1-7 are assigned without sub-notice. That is, a value in the range of “1” to “190” is assigned without sub-notice. With such a setting, the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, compared to a variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is a reach state. The ratio of executing the notice effect is low, and the ratio of executing the sub notice effect is high as compared to the case where the change pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific pattern is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. The ratio of executing a sub-notice effect with a high jackpot reliability is higher, while the ratio of executing a sub-notice effect with a higher jackpot reliability than when the variable display form of the decorative pattern is a reachable variation pattern. Becomes lower.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, a reach effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state is selected and determined from a plurality of types. The reach production pattern determination table is included. As an example of the reach effect pattern determination table, reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B shown in FIGS. 69 (A) and 69 (B) and reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B shown in FIGS. It only has to be stored in the ROM. The reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B shown in FIGS. 69 (A) and 69 (B) show that the reach effect pattern is a big hit based on the random value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern when the variable display result is “big hit”. Referenced to select and determine from APA1-1 to jackpot APA1-3, jackpot APB1-1 to jackpot APB1-3, jackpot APA2-1 to jackpot APA2-3, jackpot APB2-1 to jackpot APB2-3 It is a table. The reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B indicate that the reach effect pattern is lost based on the reach effect pattern determination random value SR9 when the variable display result is “lost”. It is a table referred to in order to select and determine from HPA 1-1 to Loss HPA1-3, Loss HPB1-1 to Loss HPB1-3. Each of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A, 172B, 173A, 173B follows the table selection setting shown in FIG. 70C, for example, whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”, and reach It is specified and set as a use table according to the value of the effect table specification buffer (reach effect table specification buffer value).

  Reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B respectively reach reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 executed according to the variation pattern when the variable display result is “big hit”. Random values SR9 for determining the production pattern are as follows: jackpot APA1-1 to jackpot APA1-3, jackpot APB1-1 to jackpot APB1-3, jackpot APA2-1 to jackpot APA2-3, jackpot APB2-1 to jackpot APB2-3 It consists of selection data to be assigned to reach production patterns. Reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B are used to determine reach effect patterns according to reach effect α1, reach effect α2, and reach effect β1, which are executed according to a variation pattern when the variable display result is “losing”. The random number SR9 is composed of data for selection assigned to reach effect patterns of the loss HPA1-1 to the loss HPA1-3 and the loss HPB1-1 to the loss HPB1-3. Further, each of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A, 172B, 173A, and 173B has a reach effect table designation buffer value corresponding to the reach effect pattern determined based on the random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern. Table data (update data) indicating a reach effect table specification buffer update setting value for updating to either “1” or “2” is included.

  Here, in the reach effect pattern determination table 172A, the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-1 corresponding to the reach effect α1 is higher than the rate of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-1, The reach effect pattern of jackpot APB1-1 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APA1-2 is greater than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APB1-2 corresponding to the reach effect α2. Although it is high, it is possible to select the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-2, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-3 corresponding to the reach effect α3 selects the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-3 Although it is higher than the percentage to do, the reach production pattern of jackpot APB1-3 As can be-option, selecting data to assign random values SR9 for reach demonstration pattern determined is set. Further, in the reach effect pattern determination table 172A, corresponding to the reach effect β1, although the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-1 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-1, the big hit The reach effect pattern of APB2-1 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APA2-2 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APB2-2 corresponding to reach effect β2 However, the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-2 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-3 corresponding to the reach effect β3 selects the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-3 Although it is higher than the percentage, select the reach production pattern of big hit APB2-3 As can be, selecting data to assign random values SR9 for reach demonstration pattern determined is set.

  On the other hand, in the reach effect pattern determination table 172B, the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-1 corresponding to the reach effect α1 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-1, but the big hit The reach effect pattern of APA1-1 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APB1-2 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APA1-2 corresponding to the reach effect α2. However, the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-2 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-3 corresponding to the reach effect α3 selects the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-3 Although it is higher than the ratio, select the reach production pattern of big hit APA1-3 As can be, selecting data to assign random values SR9 for reach demonstration pattern determined is set. Further, in the reach effect pattern determination table 172A, corresponding to the reach effect β1, the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-1 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-1, but the big hit The reach production pattern of APA2-1 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach production pattern of jackpot APB2-2 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach production pattern of jackpot APA2-2 corresponding to the reach production β2 However, the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-2 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-3 corresponding to the reach effect β3 selects the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-3 Although it is higher than the ratio, select the reach production pattern of jackpot APA2-3 As can be, selecting data to assign random values SR9 for reach demonstration pattern determined is set.

  According to the setting of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the present operation is selected from a plurality of types including the effect operation that is the same as the effect operation executed last time. An effect operation to be executed as a reach effect can be selected.

  The reach effect pattern determination table 173A is specified and set as a use table when the variable display result is “lost” and the reach effect table designation buffer value is “1”, and the lose HPA1 corresponds to the reach effect α1. -1 reach production pattern can be selected, only the reach HPA1-2 reach production pattern can be selected corresponding to the reach production α2, and the lose HPA1-3 reach corresponding to the reach production β1. Selection data for assigning a random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern is set so that only the effect pattern can be selected. The reach effect pattern determination table 173B is specified and set as a use table when the variable display result is “lost” and the reach effect table designation buffer value is “2”, and corresponds to the reach effect α1. Only the reach effect pattern of the lose HPB1-1 can be selected, only the reach effect pattern of the lose HPB1-2 can be selected corresponding to the reach effect α2, and the lose HPB1-3 corresponding to the reach effect β1 can be selected. Selection data for assigning a random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern is set so that only the reach effect pattern can be selected. When the reach effect pattern is determined to be one of the loss HPA 1-1 to the lose HPA 1-3, the reach effect table designation buffer value is updated to “2”, and the next reach effect is executed. When the reach effect pattern for selecting is selected, the reach effect pattern determination table 173B is specified and set as the use table. On the other hand, when the reach effect pattern is determined to be one of the lose HPB1-1 to the lose HPB1-3, the reach reach table designation buffer value is updated to “1”, thereby the next reach. At the time of selecting the reach effect pattern for executing the effect, the reach effect pattern determination table 173A is specified and set as the use table.

  Thus, when the variable display result is “losing”, when the reach effect pattern is selected from the lose HPA 1-1 to the lose HPA 1-3 using the reach effect pattern determination table 173A, the reach effect table designation is made. The buffer value is updated to “2”, and when the reach effect pattern for executing the next reach effect is selected, if the variable display result is “lost”, the currently selected one of the lost HPA 1-1 to the lost HPA 1-3 is selected. The reach effect pattern determination table 173B in which the table data is configured so that none of the reach effect patterns can be selected is specified and set as the use table. When the variable display result is “losing” and the reach effect pattern is selected from the lose HPB1-1 to the lose HPB1-3 using the reach effect pattern determination table 173B, the reach effect table designating buffer is selected. The value is updated to “1”, and at the time of selecting the reach effect pattern for executing the next reach effect, if the variable display result is “lost”, the currently selected one of the lost HPB1-1 to the lost HPB1-3 is selected. The reach effect pattern determination table 173A in which the table data is configured so that none of the reach effect patterns can be selected is specified and set as the use table. As described above, the reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B are each configured to include selection data set so as not to select the reach effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the reach effect to be executed this time. ing.

  As another example of the reach effect pattern determination table, a reach effect pattern determination table 174 shown in FIG. 71 may be stored in the ROM. The reach effect pattern determination table 174 shown in FIG. 71 indicates whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”, reach effect α1 to reach effect α3, reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 (the variable display result is In the case of “big hit”), or according to reach production α1, reach production α2, reach production β1 (when the variable display result is “losing”), the random value SR9 for determining the reach production pattern is set to big hit APA1-1 to big hit APA1-3, jackpot APB1-1 to jackpot APB1-3 (when the variable display result is "big hit") or lose HPA1-1 to lose HPA1-3, lose HPB1-1 to lose HPB1-3 (variable display result is " In the case of “losing”), it is composed of selection data assigned to the reach effect pattern.

  Here, in the reach effect pattern determination table 174 shown in FIG. 71, when the variable display result is “losing”, the reach effect pattern is selected from among the loss HPA 1-1 and the loss HPB 1-1 corresponding to the reach effect α1. The reach production pattern is selected from among the loss HPA1-2 and the loss HPB1-2 corresponding to the reach production α2, and the reach production pattern is selected from the loss HPA1-3 and the loss HPB1-3 corresponding to the reach production β1. Selection data for assigning a random effect value SR9 for determining a reach effect pattern is set so as to be selected and determined from among them. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the reach production pattern is selected from the big hit APA1-1 and the big hit APB1-1 corresponding to the reach production α1, and the reach production corresponding to the reach production α2. Reach so that the pattern is selected from jackpot APA1-2 and jackpot APB1-2, and the reach effect pattern is selected and determined from jackpot APA1-3 and jackpot APB1-3 corresponding to reach effect α3. Selection data for assigning a random number SR9 for determining the effect pattern is set. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, a reach production pattern is selected from big hit APA2-1 and big hit APB2-1 corresponding to reach production β1, and reach production corresponding to reach production β2. For determining the reach effect pattern so that the pattern is selected from the big hit APA2-2 and the big hit APB2-2 and selected from the big hit APA2-3 and the big hit APB2-3 in correspondence with the reach effect β3. The selection data to which the random number SR9 is assigned is set. Thereby, when the variable display result is “losing”, it is possible to select from among a plurality of types of effect operations in the reach effect α1, the reach effect α2, and the reach effect β1 that are executed according to the variation pattern. . Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect operations in reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 executed according to the variation pattern are selected from a plurality of types. be able to.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 72. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 72, the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 during the period from the start of the variation of the effect symbols until the finalized effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as the variable display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, and the effect display operation in the specific effect as the symbol variation control pattern. Each symbol variation control pattern includes, for example, various effects according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series.

  Further, the control pattern table stored in the ROM is shown in, for example, a main notice effect control pattern table 181A shown in FIG. 73A, a sub notice effect control pattern table 181B shown in FIG. 73B, and FIG. 73C. A reach effect control pattern table 181C is included.

  In the main notice effect control pattern table 181A shown in FIG. 73A, the main notice TP3-1-1, the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3- according to the effect operation in the specific effect of “Main notice” are stored. 2-1, corresponding to each of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns such as a main notice TP3-2-2, a main notice TP3-3-1, and a main notice TP3-3-2, for example, in a specific effect of “main notice” It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the specific effect of the “main notice” such as the effect display operation as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect pattern corresponding to the specific effect of the “main notice” includes various effects according to the variable display of the effect symbols such as the effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is only necessary to set various contents of the effect control, the timing of switching the effect control, and the like in time series.

  As an example, the main notice effect control pattern table 181A includes a main notice TP3-1-1, a main notice TP3-1-2, a main notice TP3-2-1, a main notice TP3-2-2, and a main notice TP3-3. -1, main notice CMP1-1, main notice CMP1-2, main notice CMP2-1, main notice CMP2-2, main notice CMP3-1 corresponding to each of the specific effect patterns of main notice TP3-3-2 The notice effect control pattern of the main notice CMP3-2 is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the main notice CMP1-1 displays a character image CH1 having a pompom as an effect operation associated with the reach effect α1. The character image CH1 may be an effect image that appears in the reach effect α1. The notice effect control pattern of the main notice CMP1-2 displays a character image CH1 having a pompom as an effect operation associated with the reach effect α1, and then displays an effect image in which the pompon changes to a 5 kg hammer. . The notice effect control pattern of the main notice CMP2-1 displays a character image CH1 having a brown 100 kg hammer as an effect operation associated with the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3. The character image CH1 may be an effect image that appears not only in the reach effect α1, but also in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3. The notice effect control pattern of the main notice CMP2-2 displays a character image CH1 having a golden 100 kg hammer as an effect operation associated with the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3. The notice effect control pattern of the main notice CMP3-1 displays the character image CH2 wearing blue clothes as an effect operation associated with the reach effects β1 and β2. The character image CH2 may be an effect image that appears in the reach effects β1 and β2. The notice effect control pattern of the main notice CMP3-2 displays the character image CH2 in red as an effect operation associated with the reach effects β1 and β2.

  The production operation associated with the reach production may be any production operation that allows the player to recognize the relevance. For example, it is only necessary that the same music as the music output as the rendering operation in the reach effect, a part of the music, or the music of another phrase is output. In addition, an effect display may be performed so that the player can recognize the story developed in the reach effect. As a specific example, when a story of Momotaro is developed as a reach effect, an effect image showing a kibidango may be displayed as an effect operation associated therewith. On the other hand, when the story of Taro Urashima is developed as a reach effect, an effect image indicating a turtle may be displayed as an effect operation associated therewith. The production operation associated with the reach production may be executed using data common to the data (for example, image data) used when the reach production is executed, or the common data is used. Even if it does not exist, the operation | movement aspect of production | presentation operation | movement may be what a player can recognize the relevance with reach production.

  In the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181B shown in FIG. 73 (B), control of effect operations corresponding to the sub-notice effect, such as an effect display operation in the sub-notice effect, corresponding to each of the plurality of types of sub-notice effects. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern corresponding to the sub notice effect includes various effect operations corresponding to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is only necessary to set various contents of the effect control, the timing of switching the effect control, and the like in time series.

  For example, in the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181B, sub-notice CYP1-1 to sub-notice CYP1-4 notice effect controls corresponding to the sub-notice patterns YP1-1 to YP1-4, respectively. A pattern is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-1 displays the character image MC101 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-2 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC102 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-3 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC103 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP1-4 displays the character images MC101 to MC103 corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP1-4.

  In addition, the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181B includes sub-notice CYP2-1 to sub-notice CYP2-4 notice effect control patterns corresponding to the sub-notice patterns YP2-1 to YP2-4. Is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP2-1 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-1, and the sub notice is not performed without switching the effect image. The production ends. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-2, and ends the sub notice effect without switching the effect image. To do. The notice effect control pattern of the sub-notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the sub-notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-3 and switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step. The sub notice effect is finished. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and After switching to the effect image of the third step, the sub notice effect is ended.

  In addition, the sub-notice effect control pattern table 181B stores the notice effect control patterns of the sub-notice CYP3-1-1 and the sub-notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the sub-notice pattern of the sub-notice YP3-1. Sub notice CYP3-2-1 and sub notice CYP3-2-2 notice effect control patterns are stored corresponding to the sub notice YP3-2 sub notice pattern, and corresponding to the sub notice YP3-3 sub notice pattern. The notice effect control patterns of the sub notice CYP3-3-1 and the sub notice CYP3-3-2 are stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-1-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected, corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-1-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-2-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected, corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-2-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-3-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the sub notice CYP3-3-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the sub notice pattern of the sub notice YP3-3.

  In the reach effect control pattern table 181C shown in FIG. 73 (C), the big hit APA1-1 to the big hit APA1- according to the effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state. 3, jackpot APB1-1 to jackpot APB1-3, jackpot APA2-1 to jackpot APA2-3, jackpot APB1-1 to jackpot APB1-3, lose HPA1-1 to lose HPA1-3, lose HPB1-1 to lose HPB1 Corresponding to each of a plurality of types of reach effect patterns such as 3, the data indicating the control contents of the effect operation corresponding to the reach effect, such as an effect display operation, an audio output operation, and a lamp lighting operation in the reach effect, is reach effect control. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types as patterns. Each reach effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series.

  As an example, the reach effect control pattern table 181C includes big hit APA1-1 to big hit APA1-3, big hit APB1-1 to big hit APB1-3, big hit APA2-1 to big hit APA2-3, big hit APB1-1 to big hit APB1- 3. Corresponding to each of the reach effect patterns of Loss HPA1-1 to Loss HPA1-3, Loss HPB1-1 to Loss HPB1-3, Big hit CAA1-1 to Big hit CAA1-3, Big hit CAB1-1 to Big hit CAB1- 3, the jackpot CAA2-1 to the jackpot CAA2-3, the jackpot CAB2-1 to the jackpot CAB2-3, the lost CHA1-1 to the lost CHA1-3, the lost CHB1-1 to the lost CHB1-3 are stored. Yes.

  Here, the reach effect control pattern of the big hit CAA1-1 and the big hit CAB1-1 is an effect control pattern for executing the effect operation that becomes the reach effect α1 when the variable display result is “big hit”. If it is CAA1-1, the effect operation of reach effect α1A (big hit) is executed, and if it is big hit CAB1-1, the effect operation of reach effect α1B (big hit) is executed. In both the reach effect α1A (big hit) and the reach effect α1B (big hit), the character image CH1 may appear, but for example, an effect operation having different effect modes may be performed, for example, different stories are developed. . As an example, in the reach presentation α1A (big hit) and the reach presentation α1B (big hit), data (for example, image data, etc.) used when executing the reach presentation have completely different configurations, so that different stories Should be expanded. On the other hand, regardless of whether the reach effect α1A (big hit) or the reach effect α1B (big hit) is executed, if the change pattern is the same, the change time of the special symbol and the effect symbol will be the same. That is, at least the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern, and it may be set so that the variation time does not change depending on the determination result of the reach effect pattern. The reach effect control pattern of the big hit CAA1-2 and the big hit CAB1-2 is an effect control pattern for executing an effect operation that becomes the reach effect α2 when the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit CAA1-2 If so, the reach operation of reach effect α2A (big hit) is executed, and if it is big hit CAB1-2, the effect operation of reach effect α2B (big hit) is executed. In both the reach effect α2A (big hit) and the reach effect α2B (big hit), the character image CH1 may appear, but it is only necessary to perform effect operations with different effect modes such as, for example, development of different stories. . As an example, in the reach presentation α2A (big hit) and the reach presentation α2B (big hit), the data used when the reach presentation is executed (for example, image data, etc.) are completely different from each other, and thus different stories. Should be expanded. The reach effect control pattern of the big hit CAA1-3 and the big hit CAB1-3 is an effect control pattern for executing the effect operation that becomes the reach effect α3 when the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit CAA1-3 If it is, the effect operation of reach effect α3A (big hit) is executed, and if it is big hit CAB1-3, the effect operation of reach effect α3B (big hit) is executed. In both the reach effect α3A (big hit) and the reach effect α3B (big hit), the character image CH1 may appear, but for example, an effect operation with different effect modes may be performed, for example, different stories are developed. . As an example, the reach presentation α3A (big hit) and the reach presentation α3B (big hit) have different structures because the data (for example, image data) used for executing the reach presentation have completely different configurations. Should be expanded.

  The reach effect control pattern of the big hit CAA2-1 and the big hit CAB2-1 is an effect control pattern for executing an effect operation that becomes the reach effect β1 when the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit CAA2-1 If it is, the effect operation of reach effect β1A (big hit) is executed, and if it is big hit CAB2-1, the effect operation of reach effect β1B (big hit) is executed. In both the reach effect β1A (big hit) and the reach effect β1B (big hit), while the character image CH2 appears, for example, different effect modes such as a different story may be developed. Good. As an example, the reach presentation β1A (big hit) and the reach presentation β1B (big hit) have different structures because the data (for example, image data) used when executing the reach presentation are completely different from each other. Should be expanded. The reach effect control pattern of the big hit CAA2-2 and the big hit CAB2-2 is an effect control pattern for executing an effect operation that becomes the reach effect β2 when the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit CAA2-2 If it is, the effect operation of reach effect β2A (big hit) is executed, and if it is big hit CAB2-2, the effect operation of reach effect β2B (big hit) is executed. In both the reach effect β2A (big hit) and the reach effect β2B (big hit), while the character image CH2 appears, for example, different effect modes such as a different story may be developed. Good. As an example, in the reach presentation β2A (big hit) and the reach presentation β2B (big hit), the data used when the reach presentation is executed (for example, image data, etc.) have completely different configurations, so that the stories differ from each other. Should be expanded. The reach effect control pattern of the big hit CAA2-3 and the big hit CAB2-3 is an effect control pattern for executing the effect operation that becomes the reach effect β3 when the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit CAA2-3 If it is, the effect operation of reach effect β3A (big hit) is executed, and if it is big hit CAB2-3, the effect operation of reach effect β3B (big hit) is executed. In both the reach effect β3A (big hit) and the reach effect β3B (big hit), while the character image CH3 appears, for example, different effect modes such as different stories are executed. Good. As an example, in the reach presentation β3A (big hit) and the reach presentation β3B (big hit), the data used when the reach presentation is executed (for example, image data, etc.) are completely different from each other, and thus different stories. Should be expanded.

  The reach effect control pattern of the lose HPA1-1 and the lose HPB1-1 is an effect control pattern for executing the effect operation that becomes the reach effect α1 when the variable display result is “lost”, and the lose HPA1-1. If so, the effect operation of reach effect α1A (losing) is executed, and if it is a loss HPB1-1, the effect operation of reach effect α1B (losing) is executed. In the reach effect α1A (losing), after the effect operation similar to the reach effect α1A (big hit) is performed in the common effect period from the start of the effect operation in the reach effect until the predetermined time elapses, the variable display result Corresponding to becoming “losing”, it is only necessary to perform an effect operation different in the effect mode from the reach effect α1A (big hit). As an example, the reach production α1A (losing) uses the same data (eg, image data) as the reach production α1A (big hit), thereby performing the same production operation as the reach production α1A (big hit) in the common production period. After being broken, by using data different from the reach effect α1A (big hit), it is only necessary to execute an effect operation having an effect mode different from that of the reach effect α1A (big hit). In the reach production α1B (losing), after the same production operation as the reach production α1B (big hit) is performed in the common production period, the reach display α1B (big hit) corresponds to the variable display result being “losing” ) May be anything that can be performed in a different direction. As an example, the reach performance α1B (losing) uses the same data (for example, image data) as the reach performance α1B (big hit), thereby performing the same production operation as the reach production α1B (big hit) in the common performance period. After being broken, by using data different from the reach effect α1B (big hit), it is only necessary to execute an effect operation having an effect mode different from the reach effect α1B (big hit). The reach effect control pattern of the lose HPA1-2 and the lose HPB1-2 is an effect control pattern for executing the effect operation that becomes the reach effect α2 when the variable display result is “lost”, and the lose HPA1-2. If so, an effect operation of reach effect α2A (losing) is executed, and if it is a loss HPB1-2, an effect operation of reach effect α2B (losing) is executed. In the reach production α2A (losing), after the same production operation as the reach production α2A (big hit) is performed in the common production period, the reach display α2A (big hit) corresponds to the variable display result being “losing” ) May be anything that can be performed in a different direction. As an example, the reach production α2A (losing) uses the same data (for example, image data) as the reach production α2A (big hit), thereby performing the same production operation as the reach production α2A (big hit) in the common production period. After being broken, by using data different from the reach effect α2A (big hit), it is only necessary to execute an effect operation having an effect mode different from that of the reach effect α2A (big hit). In the reach production α2B (losing), after the same production operation as the reach production α2B (big hit) is performed in the common production period, the reach display α2B (big hit) corresponds to the variable display result being “lost” ) May be anything that can be performed in a different direction. As an example, the reach production α2B (losing) uses the same data (eg, image data) as the reach production α2B (big hit), thereby performing the same production operation as the reach production α2B (big hit) in the common production period. After being broken, it is only necessary to execute an effect operation different from the reach effect α2B (big hit) by using data different from the reach effect α2B (big hit). The reach effect control pattern of the lose HPA1-3 and the lose HPB1-3 is an effect control pattern for executing the effect operation that becomes the reach effect β1 when the variable display result is “lost”, and the lose HPA1-3. If so, the effect operation of reach effect β1A (losing) is executed, and if it is the loss HPB1-3, the effect operation of reach effect β1B (losing) is executed. In the reach production β1A (losing), after the production operation similar to the reach production β1A (big hit) is performed in the common production period, the reach display β1A (big hit) corresponds to the fact that the variable display result is “losing” ) May be anything that can be performed in a different direction. As an example, the reach performance β1A (losing) uses the same data (for example, image data) as the reach performance β1A (big hit), thereby performing the same production operation as the reach production β1A (big hit) in the common production period. After being broken, by using data different from the reach effect β1A (big hit), it is only necessary to execute an effect operation having an effect mode different from that of the reach effect β1A (big hit). In the reach production β1B (losing), after the production operation similar to the reach production β1B (big hit) is performed in the common production period, the reach display β1B (big hit) corresponds to the fact that the variable display result is “losing” ) May be anything that can be performed in a different direction. As an example, the reach production β1B (losing) uses the same data (for example, image data) as the reach production β1B (big hit), thereby performing the same production operation as the reach production β1B (big hit) in the common production period. After being broken, by using data different from the reach effect β1B (big hit), it is only necessary to execute an effect operation having an effect mode different from that of the reach effect β1B (big hit). The common effect period may be the same time length regardless of the reach effect control pattern, or may be a different time length depending on the reach effect control pattern.

  Furthermore, the control pattern table stored in the ROM includes various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 74, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state and the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. That's fine. Each effect control pattern includes an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. The contents of various effects control according to the progress, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display area 93 is executed (step S708). In addition, a random number update process for updating each random number for determining the symbol, effect, etc. shown in FIG. 50 is executed (step S709). Further, a notification control process for performing notification using an effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed (step S710). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 changes either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol based on the symbol variation designation command received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the common ornament symbol display control process. And control to output a display signal to the decorative symbol displays 9a and 9b corresponding to the specified decorative symbol.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  77 to 79 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (background specifying command: 9500 (H) to 9503 (H)) for specifying the background in the effect display device 9 (Y in step S614), the effect control CPU 101 A background display state flag corresponding to the content of the background designation command is set (step S615A). Specifically, if the background specification command is the normal state background specification command, the background display state flag in the normal state is set, and if the background specification command is the probability change state background specification command, the background display state in the probability change state Set the flag, set the background display state flag when the background specification command is in the time reduction state if the background specification command is the background specification command, and set the background when in the chance mode state if the background specification command is the chance mode background specification command Set the display status flag. Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the current gaming state is the latent probability changing state based on the set / reset of the latent probability changing flag (see step S893) (step S615B). Control for displaying the background in the short-time state as the background (background image, background color, etc.) of the effect display device 9 is executed (step S615C). If it is not the latent probability changing state, control for displaying a background corresponding to the gaming state confirmed based on the background designation command as the background of the effect display device 9 is executed (step S615D).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S616), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S617). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 stores the display result specifying command in a display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (step S620). .

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot start 1-4 designation commands (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S629), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen indicating that the initialization process has been executed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed (step S630). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Further, an initial notification flag is set (step S631), and a value corresponding to the initial notification period value is set in the period timer (step S632). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of the initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 101 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, the abnormality notification designation command is not received when the initialization notification is performed.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot end 1-3 designation commands (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets one of the jackpot end 1-3 designation command reception flags (step S642).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize notification designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received presentation control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S651), the presentation control CPU 101 uses the second byte data (EXT data) of the combined pending storage number designation command as a combined pending storage number storage area. (Step S652). If the CPU 101 for effect control receives the same total pending storage number designation command twice without receiving the total pending storage count subtraction designation command, it discards the first total pending storage count designation command received. (For example, the total pending storage number storage area is once cleared, and the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command received second time may be stored in the total pending storage number storage area.

  If the received effect control command is the first start winning designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 sets the first start winning flag (step S654). If the received effect control command is the second start winning designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 sets the second start winning flag (step S656). If the received effect control command is a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 sets a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag (step S658).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step S659). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  In addition, in step S219 of FIG. 19, instead of the process of transmitting the combined reserved memory number designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, a reserved memory number designation command indicating the number of reserved memories indicated by the start port pointer is transmitted. If configured as described above, in step S651, processing for storing the reserved storage number designation command in a predetermined storage area (holding storage number storage area) is performed.

  In addition, in step S219 of FIG. 19, when it is configured not to perform the process of transmitting the total pending storage number designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, in the case of N of step S645, the process of step S653 is performed. Transition. Then, the production control CPU 101 recognizes whether the first start prize or the second start prize has occurred based on the contents of the start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command). (Steps S653, S655) When the first start winning is recognized, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is updated (updated to data corresponding to the value indicating the current total pending storage number). Then, the value of the first start winning counter is incremented by one. Further, when it is recognized that the second start winning is generated, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is updated and the value of the second start winning counter is incremented by one. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to transmit the total pending storage number designation command, the number of commands can be reduced, and the processing load on the CPU 56 and the effect control CPU 101 can be reduced.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display state of the summed pending storage display area 93. As shown in FIGS. 80A and 80B, the total pending storage display area 93 displays a number of circles (up to 8) corresponding to the total pending storage number. The effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP 109 to display a circle so that the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory can be distinguished. For example, a circle corresponding to the first reserved memory is displayed in red, and a circle corresponding to the second reserved memory is displayed in green. Note that the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory may be displayed in the same manner (for example, in the same shape and the same color).

  FIG. 80 (C) shows an example of the display state of the total pending storage display area 93 at the time of power failure recovery. As shown in FIG. 80 (C), at the time of power failure recovery, a number of stars corresponding to the total number of pending storage is displayed in the total pending storage display area 93. FIG. 80D shows an example of the display state of the total pending storage display area 93 when the total pending storage number designation command is received from the gaming control microcomputer 560 but the start winning designation command cannot be received. ing. As shown in FIG. 80 (D), when the start winning designation command cannot be received, a blue circle is displayed in the total pending storage display area 93.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (C), at the time of power failure recovery, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a display corresponding to the original first reserved memory (first start winning memory) (in this example, a red circle is displayed). ) And the display corresponding to the second reserved memory (second start-up winning memory) (in this example, the display of the green circle) is a display of the number specified by the total reserved memory number designation command (this In the example, an asterisk) is displayed in the total pending storage display area 93. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the gaming state has been restored by using the display of the total pending storage display area 93. In addition, if the display mode of the total pending storage display area 93 at the time of power failure recovery is different from the display mode corresponding to the original first reserved memory and the display mode corresponding to the second reserved memory, this embodiment It is not restricted to changing the shape of the displayed image. For example, the color may be changed without changing the shape, or the size may be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 80D, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the display corresponding to the original first reserved memory (in this example, a red circle). The image corresponding to the increased reserved memory is displayed in a different manner from the display corresponding to the second reserved memory (in this example, the display of the green circle). Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that an abnormality has occurred with respect to transmission / reception of the effect control command (in this example, the start winning designation command).

  In addition, since the display mode of the total pending storage display area 93 when the start winning designation command cannot be received is different from the display mode corresponding to the original first reserved memory and the display mode corresponding to the second reserved memory. If there is, it is not limited to changing the color of the displayed image as in this embodiment. For example, the shape (for example, a star) may be changed without changing the color, or the size may be changed.

  Further, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, a predetermined one of the red or green circles may be displayed. For example, when a start winning designation command cannot be received, a red circle may always be displayed in the total pending storage display area 93, or a green circle may always be displayed.

  Further, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, it may be determined randomly whether to display a red or green circle. For example, when a start winning designation command cannot be received, it is determined whether to display a red or green circle by a lottery process using a random number and display it in the total pending storage display area 93. Good.

  Further, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, it may be determined whether to display a red or green circle based on the number of reserved storage. For example, if the start winning designation command cannot be received and the first reserved memory number is the upper limit value (4), the second start winning designation command should be received. You may make it display on the total pending | holding memory | storage display area 93. FIG. On the contrary, for example, when the second reserved memory number is the upper limit value (4), the first start winning designation command should be received, and therefore a red circle is displayed in the total reserved memory display area 93. You may do it. Further, even if the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value, it is determined which of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is larger, and the smaller reserved memory is dealt with. A color circle may be displayed. For example, if the first reserved memory number (for example, 2) is less than the second reserved memory number (for example, 3), a red circle may be displayed in the combined reserved memory display area 93. Conversely, it may be determined which of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is larger, and a circle of a color corresponding to the larger reserved memory may be displayed.

  In addition, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, it may be determined whether to display a red or green circle based on the total number of pending storage. For example, a large number of combined pending storages means that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in an open state and is easy to win the second start winning opening 14 (totally the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 It is often easy to win a prize. In this case, it is determined whether or not the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 4). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a green circle is displayed in the total pending storage display area 93, and is less than the predetermined value. If so, a red circle may be displayed in the summed hold storage display area 93.

  Further, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, it may be determined whether to display a red or green circle based on the gaming state. For example, the fact that the gaming state is in the high base state means that the frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 being in the open state is increased and the second starting winning opening 14 is likely to be won (the first starting winning prize in total). In many cases, it is easy to win the entrance 13 and the second start winning opening 14. In this case, it is determined whether the gaming state is the high base state or the low base state. If the gaming state is the high base state, a green circle is displayed in the total pending storage display area 93. For example, a red circle may be displayed in the summed hold storage display area 93.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol (first ornament symbol or second ornament symbol) and the effect symbol is started. Further, when the gaming state is a short time state, processing for updating information (remaining number of times) that can specify the total number of times and processing for changing the background of the effect display device 9 are executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. Further, when the gaming state is a short time state, processing for updating information (remaining number of times) that can specify the total number of times and processing for changing the background of the effect display device 9 are executed. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol or second decorative symbol) and the production symbol Control is performed to stop the fluctuation and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S806).

  Big hit end processing (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  83 and 84 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S820). Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the variation pattern command read from the variation pattern command storage area is a variation pattern of pseudo continuous variation (2 to 4 times) (non-reach PD1-1 to non-reach PD1-6 shown in FIG. 9). ) Is checked (step S821A). If the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation (Y in step S821A), the time from the start of variation of the effect symbol to the re-variation after the temporary stop of the effect symbol (variation restart), or the re-variation after the temporary stop of the effect symbol A temporary stop time timer for measuring the time until re-change after the next temporary stop of the effect symbol is started (step S821B).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a time-short state (step S821C). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not the time reduction state is present by checking the background display state flag. If it is in the short time state (Y in step S821C), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the short time counter for production in order to count the number of fluctuations (number of short times) in which the actual short time state can continue (step S821C). S821E). It should be noted that the value of the short time counter for performance is updated in synchronization with the value of the short time counter updated by the game control microcomputer 560. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining number counter for counting the remaining number of times (information that can specify the total number of times) displayed in the number display area 92 of the effect display device 9 (step S821F). .

  On the other hand, if it is not the time saving state in step S821C (N in step S821C), the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is in the latent probability changing state based on the latent probability changing flag (step S821D). If it is not the latent probability changing state (N in step S821D), the process proceeds to step S822. If the latent probability change state is present (Y in step S821D), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining number counter (step S821F).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the remaining number counter is 0 (step S821G). Here, the value of the remaining number counter being 0 means that the time reduction state is apparently finished, that is, the remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area 92 is updated and displayed as “0 times remaining”. This means that the next change is started after the end of the change (FIG. 44 (l), FIG. 46 (l)). If the value of the remaining number counter is not 0 (N in step S821G), the remaining number still remains, so the presentation control CPU 101 updates the remaining number in the number display area 92 based on the value of the remaining number counter. Display (subtraction update display) is performed (step S821H). Then, the process proceeds to step S822. As shown in FIG. 45, when the number of executions is added as information that can specify the total number of times, the number of executions is updated and displayed (additional update display).

  If the value of the remaining number counter is 0 (Y in step S821G), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a latent probability changing state (step S821I). In the latent probability changing state, the player is in a short time state but is actually in a probable state, and there is no restriction on the number of time reductions (the number of fluctuations in which the time reduction state can be continued). Displays the time extension on the display screen of the effect display device (for example, “EXTRA Yumemu TIME”), and executes control for displaying the background of the time extension state as the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S821K). ). For example, the background image in the time extension state is displayed, and the background color is changed to the background color in the time extension state (for example, yellow).

  If it is not in the latent probability changing state, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the effect time count counter is 0 (step S821J). Here, the value of the effect time reduction counter is 0. This means that the game state is the time reduction state, the remaining number counter value is 0, and the effect time reduction counter value is 0. There is no difference between the remaining number of fluctuations that can be continued and the remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area 92, which means that the time-short state is actually (really) ended. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background of the effect display device 9 to the background in the normal state (step S821L). On the other hand, if the value of the short time counter for production is not 0, there is a difference between the remaining fluctuation number in which the actual short time state can be continued and the remaining number displayed in the number display area 92, and the apparent short time state ends. However, the short-time state means that it does not actually end. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 displays the time extension on the display screen of the effect display device (for example, “EXTRA Dream Dream TIME”), and displays the background of the time extension state as the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Control is executed (step S821K). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S822.

  In step S822, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S821). When the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is reset (step S822), and the first ornament symbol variation indicating that the variation of the first ornament symbol is started. A request flag is set (step S823). Then, for example, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the decorative symbol switching timer for determining the switching timing of the lighting LED (step S825). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S828.

  If the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set, the second symbol variation designation command reception flag should be set. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (step S825), and sets the second symbol variation request flag indicating that the variation of the second symbol variation is started (step S826A). At the same time, a second reserved memory number subtraction flag indicating that the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 is set (step S826B). Then, for example, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the decorative symbol switching timer for determining the switching timing of the lighting LED (step S827). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S828.

  In step S828, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect symbol variation setting processing (step S828). The contents of the effect symbol variation setting process will be described later (FIGS. 85 and 86).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table (one of the symbol variation control pattern tables shown in FIG. 72) corresponding to the variation pattern (the type of the announcement effect when the announcement effect is executed) (step 1). S833). Then, a process timer in the process data (data constituting the process table) of the selected process table is started (step S834).

  The production control CPU 101 has the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound, on condition that the abnormality notification flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification is being performed is not set. Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, the various lamps as the effect part, and the speaker 27 as the effect part) is executed according to the number data 1) (steps S835A and S835B). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  When the abnormality notification flag is set, the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 (steps S835A and S835C). In other words, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of the production symbol is started, a sound production according to the variable display is not executed, but an abnormal prize is notified. The corresponding sound output is continued.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S835C, the effect control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. That is, control is performed so that the display at that time (notification of abnormal winning is made) on the effect display device 9 and the display effect image of the variable display of the effect symbol are displayed on the effect display device 9 at the same time. . That is, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of the effect symbol is started, not only the display effect corresponding to the variable display is executed, but an abnormal winning notification is made. The notification according to is continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S836), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S837).

  85 and 86 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect symbol variation setting process executed in step S828 of FIG. In the effect symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the display result specifying command (step S501). At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S502; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, if the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 9). It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

When it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” (step S503; Yes), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined effect symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 51D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8
The combination of 1-5 and FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed effect symbol.

  When it is determined in step S503 that it is not a variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “end of development chance” (step S503; No), the combination of the definite effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination Is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 51A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 51 (B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 51C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Thus, the combination of the confirmed effect symbols does not become a reach combination or jackpot combination, and even if it is other than the reach combination or jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in (B), the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of determined effect symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 54 (A) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 54 (B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the effect symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, the effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the “left” and “right” effects other than the “medium” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. The effect symbols for the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the symbol display area are determined. Then, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1. , The design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is It is determined whether it is one of the “surprise” or other than that (step S507). At this time, when the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S507; Yes), for example, the change pattern designation command By reading the EXT data or the like, it is determined whether the specified variation pattern is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, all the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. Therefore, if it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG 1-1 to special PG 1-4 (step S508; Yes), the process proceeds to step S503, and the processes in steps S504 and S505 are performed. By either of these, the definite effect design used as the last stop design is determined. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is special in step S503. If it is a variation pattern of PG1-4 (see FIG. 9), it is determined that the variation pattern executes a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 variation pattern (step S508; No), the designated variation pattern is the variation of the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3. It is determined whether the pattern is one of the patterns or other patterns (step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, each of the variation patterns of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 specifies that the “normal” reach effect is performed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state. ing. For this reason, if it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is one of the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; Yes), the process proceeds to step S506, and the last combination constituting the reach combination is performed. A finalized design to be a stop design is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; No), the designated variation pattern is variation of special PG3-1 to special PG3-3. One of the patterns. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3, the combination of the determined production symbol that is the variable display result of the production symbol is any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of any of the variation patterns of these special PG3-1 to special PG3-3, the combination of the definitive effect symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 55C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, the combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed effect symbol.

  In step S507, when the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S507; No), among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “ It is determined whether any one of “normal big hit” and “third probability variation” or any other one (step S511). At this time, when the big hit type is “ordinary big hit” or when the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S511; Yes), the final effect symbol which becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal big hit combination. Is determined (step S512). As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 55A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed effect design.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” in step S511 (step S511; No), it corresponds to the big hit type being either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. And the combination of the definite effect design which becomes the last stop design which constitutes the probability variation big hit combination is determined (step S513). As an example, in the process of step S513, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 55B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed effect design.

  In this embodiment, in order to shift to the latent probability variation state that hides the transition to the probability variation state, even if the jackpot type is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed effect is produced at a certain rate. As a symbol, a non-probable variation symbol (a combination of left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, which is one of the normal jackpot combinations) is determined.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S504, S505, and S506, or after performing any of the processes of steps S510, S512, and S513, the specific effect setting process is performed (step S514). FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S514. In this specific effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern having no specific effect (step S551). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect (step S551; Yes), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the variation pattern has a specific effect (step S551; No), main notice setting processing is executed (step S552). Subsequently, it is determined whether the specific effect is any one of “slip” and “pseudo ream (chance eyes)”, or a specific effect other than these (step S553). At this time, if it is one of the specific effects of “slip” and “pseudo-run” (step S553; Yes), the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect is selected and set as the use table (step) S554). As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 56A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and shown in FIG. 56B in the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B is set.

  Following the process of step S554, the specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of types and determined (step S555). As an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, numerical data indicating a random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is selected from the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S554. To decide. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-2, the specific effect patterns are changed to pseudo-sequences TP2-1 to TP2-3 by referring to the specific-effect pattern determination table 164B set in step S554. Decide on one.

  When it is determined in step S553 that the specific effect is other than “slip” and “pseudo-run” (step S553; No), after the process of step S555 is executed, the specific effect is “slip”, “pseudo”. It is determined whether it is any of “ream”, “development opportunity”, or a specific effect other than these (step S556). At this time, if it is a specific effect other than “slip”, “pseudo train (chance eye)”, and “expansion chance eye” (step S556; No), the specific effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is any one of the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo ream (chance eyes)”, and “expansion chance eyes” (step S556; Yes), the temporary stop symbol to be displayed temporarily stopped in the specific effects Is determined (step S557), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S557, as an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, the temporary stop symbol determination table is set according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 60E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S555. One of 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development opportunity is extracted. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the effect symbol which becomes any of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is set, first, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is set to a constant M based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S555. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. At this time, a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations is set to “0”. If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 61A is selected and set as the use table, while the fluctuation pattern is super PA3-4, super In the case of any one of PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super PF1-1, and special PG1-3, FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to either the set temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S557 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 61C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S557 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 61 (D) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 in this way, the process of step S557 is terminated.

  As yet another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 63 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development opportunity is extracted. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3, which become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8, are displayed. Determine the combination.

  As an example of the main notice setting process executed in step S552, a process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88 may be executed. In this example, the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E shown in FIGS. 57A to 57C may be stored in the ROM, and the main notice table designation buffer may be provided in the RAM. In the main notice setting process shown in FIG. 88, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern having a specific effect of “main notice” (step S701). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect of “main notice” (step S701; No), the main notice setting process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the variation pattern has a specific effect of “main notice” (step S701; Yes), the third specific effect pattern is obtained from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Numerical data indicating the determination random number SR6-3 is extracted (step S702). Further, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 57D, any one of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E corresponding to the main notice table designation buffer value is specified and set as a use table (step S703). Then, based on the random value SR6-3 extracted in step S702, by referring to any one of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E set in step S703, the effect operation in the specific effect of “Main notice” is performed. The corresponding specific notice pattern for main notice is selected and determined (step S704).

  After determining the specific effect pattern for main notice in step S704, the main notice table designation buffer value is set to be updated by the main notice table designation buffer update setting value corresponding to the specific effect pattern (step S704). S705). For example, when the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice 3-1-2 in step S704, the main notice table designation buffer value is set to “1”. Update. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice TP3-2-2 in step S704, the main notice table designation buffer value is set to “ Update to 2 ”. When the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2 in step S704, the main notice table designation buffer value is set to “3”. Update.

  By executing the processing of step S705 in this way, the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “main notice” are provided. -2, every time one of the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-2-1, the main notice TP3-2-2, the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2 is selected The main notice table designation buffer value corresponding to the specified specific effect pattern can be updated so as to be set. In other words, every time the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” is selected and determined from among a plurality of types, the specific effect of the “main notice” is executed next time according to the type of the determined effect operation. Therefore, a main notice table designation buffer value is set so that a use table at the time of selecting a specific effect pattern can be specified. In the process of step S703, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, any one of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E corresponding to the main notice table designation buffer value is identified and set as a use table. By doing this, any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E can be set so that the previously performed effect operation is not selected this time as the specific effect of the “main notice”.

  As another example of the main notice setting process executed in step S552, a process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 89 may be executed. In this example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164F shown in FIG. 58 is stored in the ROM, and the RAM may be provided with the specific effect pattern storage buffer for main notice. In the main notice setting process shown in FIG. 89, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern having a specific effect of “main notice” (step S751). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect of “main notice” (step S751; No), the main notice setting process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S751 that the variation pattern has a specific effect of “main notice” (step S751; Yes), the third specific effect pattern is obtained from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Numerical data indicating the determination random number SR6-3 is extracted (step S752). At this time, the specific effect pattern determination table 164F is set as a use table (step S753). Then, by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164F set in step S753 based on the random value SR6-3 extracted in step S752, the main notification for the main effect corresponding to the effect operation in the specific effect of “main notice” Is selected and determined (step S754).

  After determining the specific effect pattern for the main notice in step S754, whether or not the specific effect pattern is the specific effect pattern including the same effect operation as the effect operation in the specific effect of the previous “main notice”. Is determined (step S755). As an example, the CPU 101 for effect control is a specific effect pattern in which the specific effect pattern stored in the main notice specific effect pattern storage buffer and the specific effect pattern determined in step S754 include the same effect operation. Or not. Here, the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1-2 are determined by the main notice CMP1-1 and the notice effect control pattern of the main notice CMP1-2 shown in FIG. Since the character image CH <b> 1 having the character is displayed, it may be determined that the specific effect pattern includes the same effect operation. Further, the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice TP3-2-2 are 100 kg hammers according to the notice effect control patterns of the main notice CMP2-1 and the main notice CMP1-2 shown in FIG. Since the character image CH <b> 1 having the character is displayed, it may be determined that the specific effect pattern includes the same effect operation. Further, the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2 are character images based on the notice effect control patterns of the main notice CMP3-1 and the main notice CMP3-2 shown in FIG. Since CH2 is displayed, it may be determined that the specific effect pattern includes the same effect operation. In this way, even in the case of specific effect patterns with different jackpot reliability, the specific effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” associated with the same reach effect includes the same effect operation. What is necessary is just to determine with it being a specific production pattern. If the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, the process may proceed to step S757 without performing the determination in step S755.

  If it is determined in step S755 that the specific effect pattern includes the same effect operation (step S755; Yes), a setting for replacing the specific effect pattern is performed (step S756). As an example, in the process of step S756, if the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, among the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice TP3-3-1, step S754 The specific effect pattern is replaced by changing it to a different one from the specific effect pattern determined in (1). At this time, either the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern or the specific effect pattern determination table 164F is changed to one prepared in advance as a preliminary, and processing corresponding to steps S752 to S754 is performed. You may make it perform. Alternatively, the process corresponding to steps S752 to S754 may be executed after waiting until the numerical data indicating the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is updated.

  When it is determined in step S755 that the specific effect pattern does not include the same effect operation (step S755; No), or after the process of step S756 is executed, the specific effect pattern for main notice is supported. The specific effect pattern is set by storing the stored data in the specific effect pattern storage buffer for main notice (step S757).

  After executing the specific effect setting process in step S514 shown in FIG. 85, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S515. In this changing promotion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” or not. (Step S571). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (step S571; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S571 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probable” (step S571; Yes), the variation shown in FIG. 59A is in progress. The promotion effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S572). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is extracted (step S573). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S573, referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A set in step S572, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first certain change”. The presence / absence of the changing promotion effect is determined according to which one of “third probability change” (step S574). At this time, if it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (step S575; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that there is a changing promotion effect (step S575; Yes), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S576). Then, the changing promotion effect setting process ends. In the process of step S576, as an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 64 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of promotion effect is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR2, the effect symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  After executing the changing promotion effect setting process as described above in step S515 shown in FIG. 85, the sub-notice effect setting process is executed (step S516). FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sub-notice effect setting process executed in step S516. In this sub-notice effect setting process, first, the sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 65 is selected and set as a use table (step S591). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random value SR7 for determining the sub notice pattern type is extracted (step S592). Then, by referring to the sub notice pattern type determination table 170 based on the numerical data indicating the random number SR7 extracted in step S592, there is no sub notice or sub notice CY1 to sub notice CY3 according to the variation pattern. The sub-notice pattern type is determined (step S593). At this time, if it is determined that there is no sub-notice (step S594; Yes), the sub-notice effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S593 that one of the sub-notice pattern types of sub-notice CY1 to CY3 (step S594; No), depending on the determined sub-notice pattern type, the sub-notice shown in FIG. One of the pattern determination table 171A, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 67, and the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 68 is selected and set as a use table (step S595). That is, if it is determined in step S593 that the sub-notice pattern type of sub-notice CY1 is determined, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171A is set. When the table 171B is set and the sub-notice pattern type of the sub-notice CY3 is determined, the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C is set. Thereafter, the sub notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S596), and the sub notice effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S596, as an example, when the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice pattern CY1, numerical data indicating the random value SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern is extracted. Then, by referring to the sub notice pattern determination table 171A set in step S595 based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random value SR8-1, there is no sub notice or sub notice YP1-1 to sub notice YP1-. One of the four sub-notice patterns is determined.

  As another example, when the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice pattern CY2, numerical data indicating the random value SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern is extracted. Then, by referring to the sub-notice pattern determination table 171B set in step S595 based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random value SR8-2, no sub-notice or sub-notice YP2-1 to sub-notice YP2- One of the four sub-notice patterns is determined.

  As another example, when the sub-notice pattern type is determined to be the sub-notice pattern CY3, numerical data indicating the random value SR8-3 for determining the third sub-notice pattern is extracted. Then, by referring to the sub notice pattern determination table 171C set in step S595 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-3, no sub notice or sub notice YP3-1 to sub notice YP3- One of the three sub-notice patterns is determined.

  After executing the sub-notice effect setting process as described above in step S516 shown in FIG. 85, the reach effect setting process is executed (step S517). As an example of the reach effect setting process executed in step S517, a process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 92 may be executed. In this example, reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B and reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B are stored in the ROM. The RAM may be provided with a reach designating table designation buffer. In the reach effect setting process shown in FIG. 92, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of “non-reach” or “normal” or other variation patterns ( Step S721). At this time, if the variation pattern is “non-reach” or “normal” (step S721; Yes), the reach effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S721 that the variation pattern is other than “non-reach” or “normal” (step S721; No), numerical data indicating a random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern is extracted (step S721). S722). Further, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 70C, the reach effect pattern determination table 172A is determined depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost” and the reach effect table designation buffer value. , 172B, 173A, 173B is specified and set as a use table (step S723). Then, based on the random value SR9 extracted in step S722, by referring to one of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A, 172B, 173A, 173B set in step S723, reach corresponding to the effect operation in the reach effect is made. An effect pattern is selected and determined (step S724).

  After the reach effect pattern is determined in step S724, the reach effect table designating buffer update setting value corresponding to the reach effect pattern is set to update the reach effect table designating buffer value (step S725). For example, in step S724, the reach production patterns are jackpot APA1-1 to jackpot APA1-3, jackpot APA2-1 to jackpot APA2-3, lose HPA1-1 to lose HPA1-3, lose HPA2-1 to lose HPA2-3. If it is selected and determined, the reach effect table designation buffer value is updated to “2”. On the other hand, in step S724, the reach production pattern is the big hit APB1-1 to the big hit APB1-3, the big hit APB2-1 to the big hit APB2-3, the lost HPB1-1 to the lost HPB1-3, the lost HPB2-1 to the lost HPB2. If it is selected and determined from -3, the reach effect table designation buffer value is updated to "1".

  By executing the processing of step S725 in this manner, each time a reach effect pattern is selected, the reach effect table designating buffer value corresponding to the selected reach effect pattern can be updated. In other words, every time a production operation in a reach production is selected and determined from among a plurality of types, a use table at the time of selecting a reach production pattern for executing a reach production next time according to the type of the decided production operation The reach effect table designation buffer value is set. Then, in the process of step S723, when the variable display result is “losing”, any of the reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B is specified and set as a use table, and the effect previously executed as the reach effect is set. Either of the reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B can be set so that the operation is not selected this time.

  As another example of the reach effect setting process executed in step S517, a process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 93 may be executed. In this example, the reach effect pattern determination table 174 shown in FIG. 71 is stored in the ROM, and the reach effect pattern storage buffer may be provided in the RAM. In the reach effect setting process shown in FIG. 93, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of “non-reach” or “normal” or other variation patterns ( Step S771). At this time, if the variation pattern is “non-reach” or “normal” (step S771; Yes), the reach effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S771 that the variation pattern is other than “non-reach” or “normal” (step S771; No), for example, a reach effect is obtained from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Numerical data indicating the random number SR9 for pattern determination is extracted (step S772). At this time, the reach effect pattern determination table 174 is set as a use table (step S773). Based on the random value SR9 extracted in step S772, the reach effect pattern determination table 174 set in step S773 is referred to, and the reach effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the reach effect is selected and determined ( Step S774).

  After the reach effect pattern is determined in step S774, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” (step S775). At this time, if it is determined that the variable display result is not “big hit” (step S775; No), the reach effect pattern determined in step S774 corresponds to the same effect operation as the effect operation in the previous reach effect. It is determined whether or not it is an effect pattern (step S776). As an example, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not the reach effect pattern stored in the reach effect pattern storage buffer matches the reach effect pattern determined in step S774. At this time, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the reach effect pattern matches regardless of the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice”.

  When it is determined in step S776 that the reach effect pattern corresponds to the same effect operation (step S776; Yes), a setting for replacing the reach effect pattern is performed (step S777). As an example, in the process of step S777, if the variable display result is “lost”, the reach effect pattern determined in step S774 among the lose HPA 1-1 and the lose HPB 1-1 when executing the reach effect α1. When the reach effect α2 is executed, the reach effect pattern is changed to one different from the reach effect pattern determined in step S774 among the lose HPA1-2 and the lose HPB1-2. In the case of execution, the reach effect pattern is replaced by changing the reach effect pattern determined in step S774 among the lose HPA 1-3 and the lose HPB 1-3.

  If it is determined in step S775 that the variable display result is “big hit” (step S775; Yes), or if it is determined in step S776 that the reach effect pattern does not correspond to the same effect operation (step S776). No), or after the process of step S777 is executed, the reach effect pattern is set by storing the storage data corresponding to the reach effect pattern in the reach effect pattern storage buffer (step S778).

  After the reach effect setting process is executed in step S517 shown in FIG. 85, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S518). At this time, the effect control CPU 101, for example, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect pattern determined in step S555 shown in FIG. 87, or the variation determined in step S574 shown in FIG. The symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 72 corresponds to the presence / absence of the promotion effect and whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “main notice”. One of the stored multiple types of symbol variation control patterns (process table) is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, for example, corresponding to the specific effect pattern determined in step S714 shown in FIG. 88 or step S754 shown in FIG. 89, or the specific effect pattern after replacement in step S756 shown in FIG. 89, FIG. (1) is selected and set as a use pattern from among a plurality of types of notice effect control patterns stored in the main notice effect control pattern table 181A. In addition, for example, any of a plurality of types of notice effect control patterns stored in the sub notice effect control pattern table 181B shown in FIG. 73 (B) corresponding to the sub notice pattern determined in step S596 shown in FIG. Is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, for example, corresponding to the reach effect pattern determined in step S724 shown in FIG. 92 or step S774 shown in FIG. 93, or the reach effect pattern after replacement in step S777 shown in FIG. ) To select one of a plurality of types of reach effect patterns stored in the reach effect control pattern table 181C.

  Although not shown in FIG. 85, following the processing in step S518, for example, corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value (time measured by the process timer) indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S518. The initial value of the process timer is set.

  After that, as described above, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data (process data) included in the symbol variation control pattern is supplied to the VDP. ”,“ Medium ”,“ Right ”effect symbol display area starts to change, and“ Left ”and“ Right ”color symbol display area starts color symbol change The setting for starting the variation of various symbols in the effect display device 9 is performed (steps S835A to S835C).

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S842). If the temporary stop time timer is started, 1 is subtracted from the value of the temporary stop time timer (step S843A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the gaming state is a time-short state (step S843B). If the time is short (Y in step S843B), the process proceeds to step S843D. If it is not the time-short state, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the gaming state is a latent probability changing state (step S843C). If it is not the latent probability changing state, the process proceeds to step S844A, and if it is the latent probability changing state, the process proceeds to step S843D.

  In step S843D, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the temporary stop time timer is 0 (whether or not it has timed out) (step S843D). Here, that the temporary stop time timer has timed out means that the time from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the re-change after the temporary stop of the effect symbol (change restart) has elapsed, or after the temporary stop of the effect symbol This means that the time from the re-variation of the time until the re-variation after the next temporary stop of the production symbol has elapsed. Accordingly, when the temporary stop time timer times out, it is necessary to perform update display of the remaining number of times, so the processing after step S843E is executed. On the other hand, if the temporary stop time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step S844A.

  Although not shown in FIG. 94, it is necessary to determine whether or not the temporary stop time timer has timed out only when the fluctuation pattern (non-reach PD1-1 to PD1-6) of pseudo continuous fluctuation is being executed. Therefore, before performing the determination in step S843D, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo continuous variation pattern is being executed based on the contents of the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area. Judgment. Although not shown in FIG. 94, when the temporary stop time timer times out, the temporary stop time timer is started to recognize the timing of re-variation after the next temporary stop of the effect symbol.

  In step S843E, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining number counter (step S843F).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the remaining number counter is 0 (step S843F). If the value of the remaining number counter is not 0 (N in step S821F), since the remaining number still remains, the presentation control CPU 101 updates the remaining number in the number display area 92 based on the value of the remaining number counter. Display (subtraction update display) is performed (step S843G). Then, the process proceeds to step S844A. As shown in FIG. 45, when the number of executions is added as information that can specify the total number of times, the number of executions is updated and displayed (additional update display).

  If the value of the remaining number counter is 0 (Y in step S843F), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the gaming state is a latent probability changing state (step S843H). In the latent probability changing state, the player is in a short time state but is actually in a probable state, and there is no restriction on the number of time reductions (the number of fluctuations in which the time reduction state can be continued). Displays the time extension on the display screen of the effect display device (for example, “EXTRA Yumemu TIME”), and executes control to display the background of the time extension state as the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S843J). ). For example, the background image in the time extension state is displayed, and the background color is changed to the background color in the time extension state (for example, yellow).

  If it is not the latent probability changing state, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the production use short time counter is 0 (step S843I). If the value of the effect short time counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background of the effect display device 9 to the background in the normal state (step S843K). On the other hand, if the value of the short time counter for the effect is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 displays the time extension on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (for example, “EXTRA dream dream TIME”). Control for displaying the background in the short time extended state as the background of the display screen is executed (step S843J). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S844A.

  In step S844A, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not a development pattern with a specific super reach has been developed or whether a specific notice production has occurred (step S844A). Whether or not the process has evolved to a specific super reach is determined, for example, by determining that the process table selected in step S833 is a process table of a variation pattern with a specific super reach, and among the process data constituting the process table It can be determined by confirming whether or not the control process has been executed up to the process data before the process data when developing to a specific super reach. Whether or not it has been developed to a specific super reach by starting a timer for recognizing the timing of development to a specific super reach at the start of fluctuation of a fluctuation pattern with a specific super reach and measuring the time with that timer May be determined.

  When it is determined that a specific super reach has been developed (Y in step S844A), the effect control CPU 101 sets a remaining value counter to a predetermined value (for example, 2 times: it is not limited to 2 times. The value of the predetermined value may be changed depending on the type of the number of times, and the remaining number is updated and displayed (additional update display) (step S844B).

  When the process timer times out (step S845), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S846). Further, on the condition that the abnormality notification flag is not set, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step S847A). , S847B).

  If the abnormality notification flag is set, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i) (step S847A). , S847C). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, a sound effect according to the variable display of the effect symbol is not executed, but the sound output according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued.

  Further, when the process of step S847C is performed, the presentation control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. . Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, not only the display effect according to the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, but also the notification according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued.

  If “second probability change” is specified in the display result specifying command (that is, if it is specified that the non-probability variable symbol is promoted to the probability variable symbol during the change), the promotion effect is performed in steps S847B and S847C. Is executed.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S848), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S850). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S849), the process proceeds to step S850. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S851). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset. In step S852, control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol in accordance with the data stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (data indicating the stop symbol) (step S853). Also, an effect symbol variation end flag is set (step S854). Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (step S855). Whether it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit is confirmed, for example, by a display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area. In this embodiment, it can be confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit according to the determined stop symbol.

  If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S856).

  If it is determined not to win, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S857).

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the effect symbol and the effect symbol variation (variable display) on condition that the symbol confirmation designation command is received (see steps S851 and S853). However, if the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, the effect symbol and the variation of the effect symbol may be controlled to end without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of variable display.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag indicating that any of the jackpot start 1-4 designation commands has been received is set (step S871). If any one of the big hit start 1 to 4 designation command reception flags is set, control is performed to display a game start screen corresponding to the set flag on the effect display device 9 (step S872). Further, the set flag (one of the big hit start 1-4 designation command reception flags) is reset (step S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805) (step S874).

  In step S872, if the big hit start 2 designation command is received, the production control CPU 101 performs a control to display a screen for informing the start of the small hit game on the production display device 9. When the jackpot start 1 designation command or jackpot start 3 designation command is received, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying the start of the jackpot game (different from the screen for notifying the start of the jackpot game). Control to display on the screen. And when the big hit start 4 designation | designated command is received, control which displays the screen which alert | reports the start of a sudden probability change big hit game on the effect display apparatus 9 is performed. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the screen for informing the start of the small hit game and the screen for informing the start of the sudden probability change big hit game are the same screen.

  If “third probability change” is specified in the display result specifying command (that is, if it is specified that a non-probability variable symbol is promoted to a probability variable symbol during a big hit game), a promotion effect is given in the big hit game processing. Is executed.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot end effect timer is set (step S880). If the big hit end effect timer is set, the process proceeds to step S885. If the jackpot end effect timer is not set, whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag (one of the jackpot end 1 to 3 designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is set Confirmation is made (step S881). When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set, the jackpot end designation command reception flag is reset (step S882), and a value corresponding to the jackpot end display time is set in the jackpot end presentation timer (step S883). Then, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a jackpot end screen (screen for notifying the end of the jackpot game) (step S884). Specifically, an instruction to display the big hit end screen is given to the VDP 109.

  In the case of a small hit, since the big hit end designation command is not received, the CPU 101 for effect control does not execute steps S881 and S882, and the value corresponding to the small hit end display time is directly displayed in the big hit end effect timer. Is set (see step S883), and the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a small hit end screen (screen for informing the end of the small hit game) (see step S884). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) based on the fact that the effect period of the small hit end display has elapsed (see step S892). .

  In step S885, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end effect timer. Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (step S886). If not, the process ends. When the jackpot end effect time has elapsed and the jackpot end 1 designation command is received (Y in step S889), that is, when the effect control command for designating the normal jackpot end is received. The production control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (100 times) in the short time counter for production (step S890), and also sets a predetermined value (100 times) in the remaining number counter (step S891). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S894).

  When the big hit end 1 designation command is received (N in step S889), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the current big hit is a latent probability change big hit (step S892). Whether or not the latent probability variation jackpot has been determined can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the stop symbol of the effect symbol determined in step S829 is a jackpot symbol (non-probability variation symbol) reminiscent of the occurrence of a normal jackpot. When the latent probability variation big hit is found (Y in step S892), the production control CPU 101 also sets a predetermined value (100 times) in the remaining number counter (step S891). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S894).

  If it is not the latent probability variation big hit (N in step S982), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S894).

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol display control process of step S706 in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the first decorative symbol display control process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first decorative symbol changing flag is set (step S781). If the first decorative symbol variation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S785. If the first decorative symbol variation flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the first decorative symbol variation request flag is set (step S782). If the first decorative symbol variation request flag is set, the first decorative symbol variation request flag is reset (step S783), and the first decorative symbol variation flag is set (step S784).

  In step S785, it is confirmed whether or not the decorative symbol variation end flag is set. If the decorative symbol variation end flag is set, the decorative symbol variation end flag is reset (step S786), and the display result is displayed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a according to the data stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area. Is displayed (step S791), and the first decorative symbol variation flag is reset (step S792).

  If the decorative symbol change end flag is not set, the value of the decorative symbol switching timer is decremented by 1 (step S787). If the value of the decorative symbol switching timer is 0 (step S788), that is, if it is the lighting LED switching timing, the LED to be lit on the first decorative symbol display 9a is switched (step S789), and the decorative symbol is switched. For example, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is reset in the switching timer (step S790). In steps S824 and S827, it is not necessary to execute the process of resetting the value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the decorative symbol switching timer.

  By the control as described above, the LEDs that are turned on in the first decorative symbol display 9a are switched every 0.5 seconds, for example, and variable display of the first decorative symbol is realized.

  Note that the program of the second decorative symbol display control process (step S707) is configured in the same manner as the first decorative symbol display control process. That is, in the above description of the first decorative symbol display control process, if “first” is read as “second”, the second decorative symbol display control process will be described.

  The first decorative symbol display control process (step S706) and the second decorative symbol display control process (step S707) may be common processes. In this case, for the process of resetting a flag such as the first decorative symbol changing flag (steps S781 to S784, S786), it is necessary to provide a process for the first decorative symbol and a process for the second decorative symbol separately. However, the processes in steps S785, S787 to S792 can be made common. For example, depending on whether the first decorative symbol changing flag is set or the second decorative symbol changing flag is set, a corresponding LED (first decorative symbol display 9a or second decorative symbol display 9b) is displayed. Control to output a display control signal is executed.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9. FIG. 99 (A) shows an example of an initial screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the initialization designation command. FIG. 99 (B) shows an example of a power failure recovery screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of a power failure recovery designation command. FIG. 99 (C) shows an example of an abnormality notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the abnormal prize notification designation command by the effect control CPU 101, and the change of the effect symbol is started. Also, it is shown that the display of the abnormality notification screen is continued (see the right side of FIG. 99C).

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the notification control process in step S709. In the notification control process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S971). The initial notification flag is set when an initialization designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see step S629 in FIG. 78). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S976. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the period timer set in step S632C is decremented by 1 (step S972). When the value of the period timer becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S973 and S974).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 9 (step S975). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the effect display device 9 according to the command.

  In step S976, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not an abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process is terminated. When the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S977), and the effect display device 9 has an abnormality with respect to the screen displayed at that time. A command to superimpose and display the notification screen is output to the VDP 109 (step S978). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the command (see FIG. 99C).

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S979). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the notification of abnormal winning is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S980).

  FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the situation of the display effect on the effect display device 9 and the sound effect by the speaker 27. FIG. 101 (A) shows an example when the effect display device 9 is performing variable display of effect symbols. FIG. 101 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 101C shows an example in which abnormality notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When receiving the abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to display an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and outputs the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. I do. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Moreover, even if the variable display of the effect symbol is finished, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued.

  The production control microcomputer 100 does not execute the control for deleting the abnormality notification screen and the control for stopping the output of the abnormality notification sound, so that the display of the abnormality notification screen on the production display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are performed. Continues until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. However, the production control microcomputer 100 stops displaying the abnormality notification screen and outputting the abnormality notification sound when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound have started. You may control. In this embodiment, the abnormality notification is performed by the effect display device 9 and the speaker 27. However, the abnormality notification may be performed using a lamp / LED. In that case, when receiving the abnormal winning notification designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lamp / LED to blink in a manner different from that in the normal state (when no abnormal winning has occurred). . In addition, even when the abnormality notification is performed using the lamp / LED, the abnormality notification using the lamp / LED is continued even if the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. .

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not detect abnormal winnings for a predetermined period (a period during which the initialization notification is executed) after the power supply to the game machine is started, and does not perform game control. The abnormal winning notification designating command is not transmitted from the microcomputer 560. However, the game control microcomputer 560 always detects an abnormal winning when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than a predetermined value (5 in this embodiment), so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the game control. If an abnormal winning notification designation command is received during a predetermined period after the power supply to the machine is started, the abnormal winning notification may not be performed. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an abnormal winning notification designation command when detecting that an abnormal winning has occurred, regardless of whether or not the initialization notification is being executed, so that the effect control microcomputer Even if the computer 100 receives the abnormal prize notification designation command during the period in which the initialization notification is being executed, the initialization notification is given priority over the abnormality notification by continuing the initialization notification without performing the abnormality notification process. You may make it make it. In that case, if an abnormal winning notification designation command is received during the period in which the initialization notification is being executed, the abnormality notification may be performed when the period in which the initialization notification is being executed ends.

  102 to 104 are flowcharts showing the hold storage display control process (step S710) in the effect control main process. In the hold memory display control process, the effect control CPU 101 stores the data in the sum hold memory number storage area in which the second byte data (EXT data) of the sum hold memory number designation command is stored in the sum hold memory number counter. It is confirmed whether it is larger than the value (step S901). If the data in the total pending storage number storage area is not greater than the value of the total pending storage number counter, the process proceeds to step S941.

  The fact that the data in the total pending storage count storage area is larger than the value of the total pending storage count counter means that a new total pending storage count designation command has been received. When the power is turned on (including when the power supply is resumed after being stopped), the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 by the initialization process in step S701. Accordingly, when the data in the total pending storage number storage area is updated based on the reception of the total pending storage number designation command transmitted at the time of power supply return in step S43 (see step S652), the total pending storage number in step S901. It is determined that the data in the storage area is larger than the value of the total pending storage number counter.

  When the data in the total reserved memory number storage area is larger than the value of the total reserved memory number counter, whether or not the production control CPU 101 has a power failure recovery flag indicating that a power failure recovery designation command has been received is set. Confirmation is made (step S902). If the power failure recovery flag is set, the power failure recovery flag is reset (step S903), and the number of stars corresponding to the data (value) in the total pending storage number storage area is displayed in the total pending storage display area 93. It is displayed (step S904). That is, the number of star images stored in the total reserved memory number storage area is displayed (see FIG. 80C).

  In addition, the production control CPU 101 sets the data in the total reserved memory number storage area in the unknown start winning memory number counter (step S905). The unknown start winning memory number counter is a counter formed in the RAM, and is a counter for counting the number of reserved memories that are unknown whether the reserved memory corresponding to the first starting prize or the reserved memory corresponding to the second starting prize is unknown. It is. Hereinafter, the reserved memory in which the reserved memory corresponding to the first start prize or the reserved memory corresponding to the second start prize is unknown is referred to as unknown reserved memory.

  Further, the number of data corresponding to the data (value) in the total reserved storage number storage area in the total pending storage table is set to data indicating “unknown” (step S906). The total hold storage table is a table formed in the RAM, and whether each hold storage is a hold storage corresponding to the first start prize, a hold memory corresponding to the second start prize, or whether it is unknown. This is a table in which data indicating is set.

  Then, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is set in the total pending storage number counter (step S907).

  When the power failure recovery flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first start winning flag indicating that the first start winning designation command has been received is set (step S909). If the first start winning flag is set, the first starting winning flag is reset (step S910), the number of circles displayed in the total pending storage display area 93 is increased by 1, and the increased circle is displayed in red. Control is performed (step S911). Further, the value of the first start winning counter is incremented by 1 (step S912), and the data corresponding to the data (value) in the total reserved storage number storage area is set to data indicating “first” in the total pending storage table (step S912). S913). For example, if the data in the total pending storage number storage area is “5”, the fifth data in the total pending storage table is set to data indicating “first”. That is, the data corresponding to the increased reserved storage is set to data indicating “first”.

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the first start winning counter has reached the upper limit “4” (step S914). If it is not “4”, the process proceeds to step S907. If it is “4”, it is checked whether or not the value of the unknown start winning counter is 0 (step S915). If the value of the unknown start winning counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S907. If the value of the unknown start winning counter is not 0 at this stage, it means that the number of unknown reserved memories indicated by the value of the unknown start winning counter is actually a reserved memory based on the second start winning prize. Because the upper limit number of the first reserved memory number is 4 and the value of the first start winning counter is 4, other reserved memories (the number of reserved memories exceeding 4) are the first start winning prizes. This is because it is not based on the reserved memory. That is, the other reserved memory is a reserved memory based on the second start winning prize.

  Accordingly, when the value of the unknown start winning counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 changes the star displayed in the total pending storage display area 93 to a green circle corresponding to the second starting win. (Step S916). Further, the data indicating “unknown” in the total pending storage table is changed to data indicating “second” (step S917). Further, the value of the unknown start winning counter is set to 0 (step S918), and the value of the second starting winning counter is updated (step S919). In step S919, the value of the unknown start winning counter before being set to 0 is added to the value of the second starting winning counter. Then, control goes to a step S907.

  By performing such control, an abnormality occurs in the transmission / reception of the production control command, an unknown hold storage occurs, and when the display corresponding to the unknown hold storage is displayed in the combined hold storage display area 93, the display is normal Display can be restored.

  If the first start winning flag is not set, it is confirmed whether the second starting winning flag is set (step S921). If the second start winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S931. If the second start winning flag is set, the second starting winning flag is reset (step S922), the number of circles displayed in the total pending storage display area 93 is increased by 1, and the increased circle is displayed. Control is performed to display green (step S923). Further, the value of the second start winning counter is incremented by 1 (step S924), and the data corresponding to the data (value) in the total reserved storage number storage area is set to data indicating “second” in the total pending storage table (step S924). S925).

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second start winning counter has reached the upper limit “4” (step S926). If it is not “4”, the process proceeds to step S935. If it is “4”, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the unknown start winning counter is 0 (step S927). When the value of the unknown start winning counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S935. When the value of the unknown start winning counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 changes the star displayed in the total pending storage display area 93 to a red circle corresponding to the first starting win (step). S928). Further, the data indicating “unknown” in the total pending storage table is changed to data indicating “first” (step S929). Further, the value of the unknown start winning counter is set to 0 (step S930), and the value of the first starting winning counter is updated (step S934). In step S934, the value of the unknown start winning counter before being set to 0 is added to the value of the first starting winning counter. Then, control goes to a step S935.

  In step S935, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is set in the total pending storage number counter.

  In step S931, the number of displays in the total pending storage display area 93 is increased by 1, and the increased display is controlled to be displayed in blue. Further, the value of the unknown start winning counter is incremented by 1 (step S932), and the data corresponding to the data (value) in the total reserved storage number storage area is set to data indicating “unknown” in the total pending storage table (step S933). . Then, control goes to a step S935.

  In step S941, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is set. If the total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is set, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is reset (step S942), and it is determined whether or not the second pending storage number subtraction flag is set. Confirmation (step S942A). If it is set, the second reserved memory number subtraction flag is reset (step S942B), and the green circle displayed most recently in the total reserved memory display area 93 (display corresponding to the second reserved memory number) Is deleted, and each circle or star is controlled to be displayed as a shift on the side of the deleted circle or star (step S942C). Also, the value of the second start winning counter is decremented by -1 (step S942D). Further, the data corresponding to the oldest second reserved memory number in the total pending storage table is erased, and the data in the total pending storage table is shifted (step S942E). Then, control goes to a step S952.

  If the second reserved memory number subtraction flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 erases the circle mark or star displayed at the earliest in the summed hold memory display area 93, and each circle mark or star mark is Control is performed so as to shift to the side of the deleted circle or star (step S943). Then, it is checked whether or not the oldest data in the summation pending storage table is data indicating “first” (step S944). If the data indicates “first”, the value of the first start winning counter is set to − 1 (step S945), the process proceeds to step S951. If the oldest data in the summation pending storage table is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “unknown”), the value of the unknown start winning counter is decremented by 1 (step S948), and step S951 is performed. Migrate to

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the data in the summation pending storage table to delete the oldest data in the summation pending storage table (step S951). Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by -1 (step S952), and the value of the total pending storage number counter is set in the total pending storage number storage area (step S953).

  By the control as described above, when the first start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are received in the total pending storage display area 93, the red circle is incremented by 1, and the second start winning designation command and the total Control is executed to increase the green circle by 1 when a pending storage number designation command is received. Further, when the total pending storage number designation command is received but neither the first start prize designation command nor the second start prize designation command is received, control for increasing the blue circle by one is realized. When the total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received, the circle or star displayed in the total pending storage display area 93 is decremented by one.

  In addition, in step S219 of FIG. 19, instead of the process of transmitting the combined reserved memory number designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, a reserved memory number designation command indicating the number of reserved memories indicated by the start port pointer is transmitted. When the process is executed, the production control CPU 101 recognizes the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number based on the content of the reserved memory number designation command (the data (EXT data) of the second byte). The CPU 101 for effect control is the current value of the second start winning counter or the first start winning counter (for example, the value of the second start winning counter when the first reserved storage number is specified by the reserved storage number specifying command). Then, the production control CPU 101 recognizes the total number of pending storage by adding the values. For other processes, it can be performed in the same process as the process shown in FIG. 102 to FIG 104.

  Further, in the case where only the start winning designation command is transmitted in step S218 in FIG. 19 and the total pending storage number designation command is not transmitted in step S219, the effect control CPU 101 designates the start winning designation. Based on the contents of the command, it is recognized whether the first start winning or the second starting winning has occurred, and when it is recognized that the first starting winning has occurred, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by one. Then, the value of the first start winning counter is incremented by one. Further, when it is recognized that the second start winning is generated, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1 and the value of the second start winning counter is incremented by 1. According to such a configuration, the number of commands can be reduced, and the processing burden on the CPU 56 and the effect control CPU 101 can be reduced.

  105 to 108 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of data set in the total pending storage table and a display example of the total pending storage display area 93.

  FIG. 105A shows an example when the process of step S913 is executed. That is, an example is shown in the case where the reserved memory based on the first start winning memory is increased. FIG. 105B shows an example of the case where the process of step S933 is executed. That is, an example is shown in which it is unclear whether the first start winning memory or the second starting winning memory is based, but the reserved memory increases. FIG. 105C shows an example in the case where the processes of steps S913 and S916 are executed. That is, an example is shown in which the hold memory based on the first start winning memory is increased and the value of the first start winning counter is “4”.

  FIG. 106D illustrates an example in which the process of step S951 is executed. That is, based on the reception of the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command and the reception of the first symbol variation designation command (that is, the second reserved memory number subtraction flag is not set), An example is shown in which the data in the combined pending storage table is shifted to erase old data (in the example shown in FIG. 106 (D), data corresponding to the first pending storage number). FIG. 106E shows an example of the case where the process of step S942E is executed. That is, the oldest second reserved memory in the total pending storage table is received based on the fact that the total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received and the second symbol variation designation command is received and the second pending memory number subtraction flag is set. An example in which the data in the total pending storage table is shifted in order to erase the data corresponding to the number is shown.

  FIG. 107 (F) shows an example when the processing of steps S904 and S906 is executed. That is, based on the receipt of the total pending storage number designation command together with the power failure recovery designation command, a number of stars corresponding to the data (value) in the total pending storage number storage area is displayed in the total pending storage display area 93, An example in which the number of pieces of data corresponding to the data (value) in the total reserved storage number storage area is set as data indicating “unknown” in the total pending storage table. When the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed in the same mode (for example, the same shape and the same color) (for example, displayed in a red circle), the total suspension is performed together with the power failure recovery designation command. Based on the receipt of the memory number designation command, the number corresponding to the data (value) in the total pending memory number storage area is summed in the same manner as the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory (for example, a red circle) It can be displayed in the storage display area 93. In this case, it is not necessary to set data indicating “unknown” as the number of data corresponding to the data (value) in the total reserved storage number storage area in the total pending storage table.

  FIG. 107 (G) shows an example of the case where the combined pending storage number designation command is received after receiving the combined pending storage count designation command together with the power failure recovery designation command. In the example shown in FIG. 107 (G), after the total pending storage number designation command is received together with the power failure recovery designation command, the total pending storage number designation command is received together with the second start prize designation command, and the processes of steps S923 and S925 are performed. It is an example when it is executed.

  When the total pending storage number designation command is received together with the power failure recovery designation command, data as shown on the left side of FIG. 107 (G) is set in the total pending storage table, and the total pending storage display area 93 has 107 (G) is displayed as shown on the left side, but when the total pending storage number designation command is received together with the second start winning designation command, the regular second startup is performed in the total pending storage display area 93. Display about winning (display of NO5) is made.

  FIG. 108 (H) shows an example of the case where the total pending storage number designation command is received after receiving the total pending storage count designation command together with the power failure recovery designation command. In the example shown in FIG. 108 (H), after receiving the combined pending storage number designation command together with the power failure recovery designation command, the combined pending storage number designation command is received together with the first start winning designation command, and the processes of steps S911 and S913 are performed. It is an example when it is executed.

  When the total pending storage number designation command is received together with the power failure recovery designation command, data as shown on the left side of FIG. 108 (H) is set in the total pending storage table, and the total pending storage display area 93 displays The display shown on the left side of 108 (H) is made. Thereafter, when the total pending storage number designation command is received together with the first start winning designation command, the regular first startup is performed in the total pending storage display area 93. Display about winning (display of NO5) is made.

  FIG. 108 (I) received the total pending storage number designation command together with the second start winning designation command in the state shown on the left side of FIG. 108 (I) (the same as the state shown on the right side of FIG. 108 (I)). An example of the case is shown. In that case, as shown on the right side of FIG. 108 (I), the display about the regular second start winning (NO6 display) is made.

  As described above, after the total pending storage number designation command is transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command, display capable of specifying the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number can be normally performed. It should be noted that when it is determined whether the start winning prize corresponds to the display (star) that is unclear as to whether it corresponds to the first starting prize or the second starting prize, It may be changed to (green circle). For example, you may make it change according to reception of a symbol fluctuation designation | designated command (special symbol specific command).

  Next, a specific example of the effect operation by displaying various effect images centering on the variable display of the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 will be described. In the effect control board 80, in response to receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 31, the effect control is performed based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. When the CPU 101 supplies a predetermined display control command to the VDP (display control unit), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas provided in the display area of the effect display device 9 are displayed. To start changing the design.

  Below, the specific example in the case where the variable display mode of a production | presentation symbol is "non-reach" among the cases where a variable display result is "losing" is demonstrated first. FIG. 109 shows that when the specific effect is not executed among the cases where the effect symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, or when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the “slip” specific effect is executed. In this case, a display operation example in the case where a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye” is executed is shown. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 109 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. 109 is designated when a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 109 (E1) to (E4) is executed, and when a non-reach PA1-5 variation pattern is designated, FIG. 109 (D1) ˜ When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as shown in (D6) is executed, and a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 is designated, “development opportunities” as shown in FIGS. 109 (F1) to (F6) This is a case where a specific effect of “eye end” is executed. In FIG. 109 (A), for example, in response to the start of the change of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the change of the effect symbol is started in all the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. The Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), the effect symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” effect symbol display area.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, the final left symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 51A is referred to in step S505 shown in FIG. In response to the determination of the effect symbol indicating the number “6” as the stop symbol FZ1-1, the effect symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 109 (B) is performed. As shown in FIG. 56 (A), if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, as shown in FIG. Since the effect pattern is always determined to be only the slip TP1-1 and the "slip" specific effect is executed in the "right" effect symbol display area to cause the effect symbol to rapidly change again, the "left" effect symbol is executed. The effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the display area is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when a specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” is executed, a combination of effect symbols constituting the development chance eyes HC6 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. In response to the determination as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, the stop display of the effect symbols as shown in FIG. 109 (B) is performed. When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the effect symbol indicating the number “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, and the diagram 61 (A) based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 3) is referred to, and the combination of effect symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is determined as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. In response to this, the stop display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. 109 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 109 (C1), the effect symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (C2), after the effect symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “medium” effect symbol display area, the final effect becomes a non-reach combination. The symbol is stopped (final stop). At this time, the finalized design determination table shown in FIG. 51 (B) is displayed in step S505 shown in FIG. By referring to 160B, or referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 51C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 52, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1. -3.

  On the other hand, when a specific effect of “pseudo-run” is executed, as an example, an effect indicating a number “7” in the “right” effect symbol display area as shown in FIG. 109 (D1) After the symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), the effect symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” effect symbol display area as shown in FIG. 109 (D2). As a result, the effect symbol that becomes the pseudo consecutive chance GC6 is stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, temporary stop display such as fluctuation display of the effect symbols may be performed, and then the effect symbols may be changed again in all effect symbol display areas as shown in FIG. 109 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 (D4) to (D6), effect symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the finalized design that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 109 (E1), the effect symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area. After the stop display), as shown in FIG. 109 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” effect symbol display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol indicating the number “7” is displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area. Here, as shown in FIG. 109 (E1), the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area is based on, for example, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the temporary symbol shown in FIG. 60 (A). It is determined by referring to the stop symbol determination table 166A. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (E4), after the effect symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” effect symbol display area, the final effect becomes a non-reach combination. The symbol is stopped (final stop).

  When a specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed, for example, the effect symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area as shown in FIG. 109 (F1) After the display (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 109 (F2), the effect symbol indicating the number “7” is also stopped (temporary stop display) in the “medium” effect symbol display area. Thereby, the effect symbols constituting the development chance HC6 are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (F3), an effect display is performed in which the temporarily stopped display effect symbol is rotated in a certain direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 109 (F4), the effect symbol is displayed. An effect display is performed so that the player can expect that the variable display state becomes a reach state. Here, if the effect symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 109 (F4) is rotated in the reverse direction, the development to reach the reach state occurs. In this example, after the effect display that the temporary stop display effect symbol in the rotation state returns to the original state as shown in FIG. 109 (F5), for example, is performed without causing the development to reach the reach state. The finalized design symbols constituting the development chance HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 110 shows a display operation example when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed among the cases where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. For example, when the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, a specific effect of “main notice” as shown in FIG. 110 is executed. In FIG. 110 (A), for example, in response to the start of the change of the special symbol in the special game, the change of the effect symbol is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. The Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 110B, the effect symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” effect symbol display area, and the “right” effect symbol display area is displayed. The effect symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the character image CH1 is displayed at a display position corresponding to the “medium” effect symbol display area. The character image CH1 only needs to appear as an effect image in a reach effect that is executed when the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state later.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 110C, for example, after the effect display that updates the effect symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas is performed, As shown in 110 (D), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” effect symbol display area, the update display to the effect symbol indicating the number “4” is changed to the “right” effect symbol display area. Then, the update display to the effect design which shows the number "3" is performed, respectively. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), after the effect display that updates the effect symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas is performed, for example, FIG. As shown in (F), with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” effect symbol display area, an update display to the effect symbol indicating “2” is displayed, while in the “right” effect symbol display area. Update display to the effect design indicating the number “1” is performed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (G), an effect display that updates the effect symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas as the character image CH1 changes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 110 (H) to (K), in the “left” effect symbol display area, the effect symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed, In the effect symbol display area “”, the effect symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” effect symbol display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (L), an effect display that updates the effect symbol is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 110 (M), “3” is displayed. An effect design indicating a number is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the specific effect of “main notice” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the definite effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). .

  FIG. 111 shows an example of a display operation when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed among the cases where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. For example, the variation pattern designation command is used to change the variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3. When any one of them is designated, a specific effect of “main notice” as shown in FIG. 111 is executed. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 111, the same effect display as in FIGS. 110 (A) to (L) is performed in the portions of FIGS. 111 (A) to (L). Thereafter, in the “right” effect symbol display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (M), the effect symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area. The variable display state becomes the reach state along with the effect symbols displayed temporarily. When the specific effect of “main notice” is thus completed, for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a reach combination, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a jackpot combination, and the like are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  112 to 114 show display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In FIG. 112 (A), for example, in response to the start of the change of the special symbol in the special game, the change of the effect symbol is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. The Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), the effect symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” effect symbol display area.

  For example, when a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIGS. 112 (C1) to (C3), After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas, the effect symbol is changed again in the “right” effect symbol display area and then stopped and displayed. The effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state of the above becomes the reach state. Further, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA4-4, as shown in FIGS. 112 (D1) to (D5) as an example, After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the effect symbol display areas, the effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the effect symbol display areas. After that, the effect symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned and stopped in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas, and the variable display state of the effect symbols is the reach state. It becomes. Further, when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, for example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (E1) to (E6), In all the effect symbol display areas, after the effect symbol combination that becomes the development chance HC6 is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), the effect display that the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped is rotated in the reverse direction. Is performed, the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 112 (C3) or 112 (D5), for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” effect symbol display area is increased. descend. For example, when the variation pattern is one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), a number indicating “6” in the “medium” effect symbol display area. A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) is displayed together with the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (B), in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed, but the variable display result is “lost”. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), after displaying an effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area where “medium” is displayed, Reach loss by, for example, stopping and displaying the effect symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” effect symbol display area, such as stopping the effect symbol number “5” in the effect symbol display area. What is necessary is just to stop and display the fixed effect symbol which comprises a combination, and complete | finish the variable display of an effect symbol. When any one of reach production α1 to reach production α3 or reach production β1 to reach production β3 is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. The fluctuation speed of the production symbol rises again, and various reach production displays are started. For example, in the reach effect β1, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 113 (D) is displayed. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 113 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 113 (F) proceeds. To do. In the reach effect α1, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), an effect symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (G), in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect symbol constituting the big hit combination is stopped and displayed, but the variable display result becomes “lost”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the confirmed effect symbols constituting the reach-losing combination and to end the variable display of the effect symbols. On the other hand, in reach effect α2 and reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, in reach effect β2 and reach effect β3, after a character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 113 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 113 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the second stage effect display is stopped (temporarily stopped). An effect symbol to be displayed appears. When the variable display result is “losing”, for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), the displayed effect symbols are not changed, and the confirmed effect symbols constituting the reach lose combination are stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to complete the variable display of the effect symbol. On the other hand, in the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 114B to 114D, the process proceeds to the third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, an effect symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage effect display appears. Here, for example, when it is decided not to execute the changing promotion effect in step S574 shown in FIG. 57, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), the temporarily stopped display effect symbol is the final stop symbol as it is. Stop display (final stop display) as a definite effect design. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the changing promotion effect, after temporarily displaying the effect symbol which is a normal jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 114 (F), FIG. 114 (G) As shown in FIG. 5, the same effect symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Then, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the big hit type being “first probability change”, for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), the temporarily stopped display effect symbol is changed again. After the change, the promotion effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed effect symbol which becomes the probability variation big hit combination. In addition, when the promotion promotion effect during change is executed, after performing the change again of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. 114 (G), for example, as in FIG. What is necessary is just to stop and display an effect design.

  FIG. 115 shows a display operation example in the case where the notice effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), for example, in response to the start of the change of special symbols in a special symbol game, the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. As shown in FIG. 115 (B), the effect symbols that were stopped and displayed at the start of the variation start in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Thereafter, for example, the information is read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 decided in step S517 shown in FIG. 54 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2 decided in step S596 shown in FIG. In accordance with the effect display control data, for example, as shown in FIG. 115C, an effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is displayed. When the player operates the operation button 120 within a predetermined period and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 120 to the effect control board 80 is turned on accordingly, for example, the effect control CPU 101 115A displays the effect image YH2 indicating the mail message as shown in FIG. 115D by switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2. Change the direction. On the other hand, when the operation button 120 is not operated within a predetermined period, the effect image YH1 is deleted as shown in FIG. 115 (E), for example, without switching the notice effect control pattern, The notice effect ends. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the effect symbols are variably displayed, such as temporarily stopping the effect symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area.

  FIG. 116 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In FIG. 116 (A), for example, in response to the start of the change of the special symbol in the special game, the change of the effect symbol is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. The After that, for example, as shown in FIGS. 116 (B) to 116 (D), effect symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped (final stop display). At this time, as the big hit effect in the two round big hit state, for example, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), an effect image for notifying the transition to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. As an ending effect in response to the end of the two round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 116 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 116, for example. As shown in (G), the display is kept displayed even after the next effect design starts to change.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the information for enabling the effect control CPU 101 to specify the total number of the execution symbol temporary stop execution times and the execution symbol derivation display execution times in the short-time state. (Remaining number of times, number of executions) is displayed in the number display area 92 of the effect display device 9, and the updated display of information that can specify the total number of times is executed based on the temporary stop of the effect symbol. Information that can specify the total number of times based on the symbol derivation display is updated and displayed. According to such a configuration, the time reduction state may continue even after the information that can specify the total number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of fluctuations in which the time reduction state can be continued (number of time reductions)). It is possible to improve the interest of games.

  In this embodiment, it is the same when selecting the variation pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and when selecting the variation pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol. Although the variation pattern is determined using the table, the variation pattern may be determined using a different table. In this case, when selecting the variation pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol, the pseudo continuous variation (at a higher rate than when selecting the variation pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol ( You may comprise so that the fluctuation pattern (non-reach PD1-1 non-reach PD1-6) of 2 times-4 times may be selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the rate at which the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous variation is selected when the time-short state is controlled, and to further improve the interest of the game.

  In the above embodiment, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to allow the player to recognize the gaming state. However, not only the background but also the sound output from the speaker 27 and the lamp / You may make it recognize a gaming state also using the pattern of lighting control of light-emitting bodies, such as LED. The gaming state may be recognized only by the sound output from the speaker 27 and the lighting control pattern of the light emitter such as a lamp / LED.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory exist, the second special symbol variation is prioritized and executed over the first special symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to preferentially execute the variation of the second special symbol based on the second start winning that is likely to cause the start winning, and the reserved memory can be efficiently digested.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the process from the start of the change of the first special symbol to the stop of the stop symbol based on the winning to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port. 14 is executed in a common processing routine (steps S300 to S304 in the special symbol process) from the start of the variation of the second special symbol to the stop symbol based on the winning to 14 in the common processing routine, Data stored in different areas when the change of the first special symbol is started and when the change of the second special symbol is started (for example, data for the first special symbol and data for the second special symbol) Commands stored in different areas in the ROM 54 (for example, symbol variation designation command, start winning designation command), variation pattern table, etc. When performing processing based on, and determine whether the variation of any of the special symbols is started (step S52), and performed in accordance with processes common program based on data corresponding to the variation of the specified symbol. For this reason, it is not necessary to repeatedly program an instruction (for example, a subroutine) for executing the same processing when the first special symbol change is started and when the second special symbol change is started. The program capacity required for control can be compressed to the minimum.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the production control microcomputer 100 cannot receive the start winning designation command, if it receives only the total pending storage number designation command, it adds the total pending storage display area 93 to the total pending storage display area 93. Display the number of pending storage in an identifiable manner. Therefore, even if it is not possible to specify whether the display corresponds to the first reserved memory number or the display corresponding to the second reserved memory number, the player can specify at least the total reserved memory number. Therefore, a minimum display can be made regarding the number of reserved memories, and it is possible to prevent a player from feeling distrust, and to continue playing a smooth game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the control state is restored, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the total pending storage number designation command together with the power failure recovery designation command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the total pending storage display. In the area 93, the total pending storage number is displayed in an identifiable manner. Therefore, when the control state is restored, the total pending storage number can be displayed recognizable to the player, and the player can be prevented from feeling distrust.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory in the same mode (for example, the same shape and the same color) and receives the start winning designation command in the total reserved memory display area 93. Even if it is configured to display the total pending storage number in a manner corresponding to the first reserved memory and the first reserved memory when the command is received without specifying the total pending memory number designation command, Allows the person to recognize the total number of pending storage, and does not give distrust. Further, since the display mode does not change, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory in different modes (for example, different shapes, different colors, etc.) in the total reserved memory display area 93 (for example, the first reserved memory). When the circle corresponding to the memory is displayed in red and the circle corresponding to the second reserved memory is displayed in green), and when the total pending memory number designation command is received without receiving the start winning designation command, In a mode corresponding to the first hold memory, a mode corresponding to the second hold memory, or a special mode not corresponding to any of the first hold memory and the second hold memory, the total number of hold memories can be specified and displayed. Even when configured in this manner, the player can be surely recognized the total number of pending storage, so that no distrust is given.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, a software random number and a random R (big hit determination random number) are obtained. When the first start winning award 13 is extracted and the software random number and random R are stored in the first storage area (the first reserved storage number buffer shown in FIG. 19), the second starting winning award 14 is stored. When a winning of is generated, the software random number and random R are stored in the second storage area (second reserved storage number buffer shown in FIG. 19). According to such a configuration, the configuration of the work area (the first reserved memory number buffer and the second reserved memory number buffer) is hardly changed, and the work at the time of creating the program can be simplified. A random number storage buffer for the second special symbol (second reserved memory number buffer) and a winning order storage area (FIG. 19A) are located behind the work area of the program for executing the control for variably displaying one special symbol. This is because it can be realized simply by providing the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) shown in FIG.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, a software random number and a random R (big hit determination random number) are obtained. The software random number and random R together with the data (data set in the start opening pointer, that is, the reserved storage specific information) indicating which start winning prize is extracted are extracted and which start winning opening is selected Even when it occurs, it is configured to execute processing for storing in a common storage area (common pending storage number buffer shown in FIG. 22). Therefore, it is not necessary to store a random number by specifying a different storage area depending on which start winning a prize has occurred, and it is possible to further share the processing routine and reduce the program capacity. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, the execution frequency of the notice effect may be reduced when the total number of pending storages is large. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the notice effect and stopping the launching operation of the game ball, thereby preventing a situation where the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second special symbol variation display is always executed in preference to the first special symbol variation display on condition that the second reserved memory number is not one. Priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol only when the game state is shifted to the short-time state (including the time-prone state and the short-time state) and the open period of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended. May be executed.

  Also, the variable display of the second special symbol may be preferentially executed only on the condition that the second reserved memory number is not 1 only when the gaming state is the probability changing state. In addition, when the gaming state is either the probability changing state or the time saving state, the second special symbol variable display may be preferentially executed on condition that the second reserved memory number is not zero.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes jackpot determination in step S62 shown in FIG. 24, and whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “hit” is variably displayed as a special symbol or effect symbol. Decide (predetermined) before the results are derived and displayed. In the process of step S98 shown in FIG. 35, based on the fact that the jackpot flag is determined to be off in step S91 in response to a pre-determined result indicating that the control is not set to the jackpot gaming state, the variable display state of the effect symbol Is determined to be in a reach state. In the process of step S101B, based on the result of determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, the result of determining whether to reach the reach state, etc. Decide on. Subsequently, in the process of step S101E, based on the determination result in step S101B, the variation pattern of the effect symbol is determined as one of a plurality of types. Thereafter, on the side of the production control board 80, for example, the production control CPU 101 for production control responds to the production pattern variation setting process or step of step S801 shown in FIG. By performing the effect symbol variation process in S802, control for executing various effect operations during variable display of the effect symbol is performed in accordance with the determination result in step S101E.

  Here, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S98 shown in FIG. 35, the step is performed using one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C set in step S100A. By executing the processing of S101B, one of a plurality of variation pattern types such as normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2 corresponding to the reach state is determined. To do. In response to the determination that the reach state is not set in step S98, the process of step S101B is performed using any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C set in step S100B. By executing, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation pattern including non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 that execute a specific effect during variable display of the effect symbol.

  In addition, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S98 shown in FIG. 35, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S101B, the loss variation pattern determination table 138B is used to perform step S101E. By executing the process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to “reach” is determined. In addition, it is determined that the reach state is not set in step S98 shown in FIG. 35, and the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type for executing the specific effect in step S101B. In response to the determination, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 prepared in advance to execute a specific effect by executing the process of step S101E using the loss variation pattern determination table 138A. Is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  In this way, even if the variable display state of the effect symbol does not reach the reach state, specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, “main notice”, and “end of development opportunity” can be executed, and various effects are possible In this way, it is possible to improve game entertainment. Further, in the processing of step S101B and step S101E, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined using a different determination table depending on whether or not the reach state is determined in step S98, and the reach state is determined. The determination process does not compete between the case where it is set and the case where the reach state is not set. Therefore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type used for determining the variation pattern type can be made common numerical data regardless of the reach determination result whether or not to reach the reach state. Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern used for determining the variation pattern can be made common numerical data regardless of the reach determination result whether or not to reach the reach state. As a result, processing executed to update the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 and the random value MR4 (for example, the display random number update processing in step S17 shown in FIG. 5 and the display random number value in step S26 shown in FIG. 6). The amount of processing in the update process can be reduced, and the amount of program can be reduced. In addition, the storage area of the random counter provided in the RAM 55 can be prevented from increasing, and the configuration can be simplified. Here, in the processing of steps S101A and S101B, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S98. In the processing of steps S101D and S101E, regardless of the result of determination of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S98, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module. Thereby, the amount of programs can be reduced as compared with a case where determination is performed using different processing modules according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state.

  In step S713 shown in FIG. 88, the effect control CPU 101 specifies and sets any one of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E according to the main notice table designation buffer value as the use table. Here, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated in step S715 by the main notice table designation buffer update setting value corresponding to the specific effect pattern for main notice determined in step S714. It is possible to specify a use table when selecting a specific effect pattern for executing a specific effect of “main notice”. At this time, in response to, for example, the fluctuation pattern being non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice table designation buffer value is set so as not to select the effect operation to be executed this time as the specific effect of “main notice” next time. The specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E are set to be specified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the same production operation from being performed continuously as the specific production of the “main notice” and to perform various production operations, thereby improving the game entertainment.

  In step S723 shown in FIG. 92, the effect control CPU 101 uses one of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A, 172B, 173A, and 173B according to the variable display result and the reach effect table designation buffer value. Specify and set as. Here, the reach effect table designation buffer value is updated in step S725 with the reach effect table designation buffer update setting value corresponding to the reach effect pattern determined in step S724, and the next reach effect is executed. It is possible to specify a use table when selecting a reach production pattern. At this time, the reach effect table designation buffer value is set to the reach effect pattern determination table 173A so that the effect operation to be executed this time as the reach effect is not selected next time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “losing”. , 173B. As a result, it is possible to prevent the same production operation from being performed continuously as a reach production, to perform various production operations, and to improve the game entertainment.

  Alternatively, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the specific effect pattern determined in step S754 is the previous “main notice” in step S755 shown in FIG. 89, for example, in response to the change pattern being non-reach PA1-6. It is determined whether or not the specific effect pattern includes the same effect operation as the effect operation in the specific effect. If the specific effect pattern includes the same effect operation, setting for replacing the specific effect pattern is performed in step S756. In this way, if the production operation selected as the specific production of the “main notice” is the same as the production operation executed last time, the same production operation will continue as the specific production of the “main notice” by replacing it with a different production operation. It is possible to perform various performance operations by preventing the game from being performed, and to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in step S776 shown in FIG. 93, the effect control CPU 101 corresponds to, for example, that the variable display result is “lost”, and the reach effect pattern determined in step S774 is the effect operation in the previous reach effect. It is determined whether the reach effect pattern corresponds to the same effect operation. If the reach effect pattern corresponds to the same effect operation, a setting for replacing the reach effect pattern is performed in step S777. In this way, if the production operation selected as the reach production is the same as the production operation executed last time, it is possible to prevent the same production operation from being continuously performed as the reach production by replacing with a different production operation. It is possible to perform the production operation and improve the game entertainment.

  In the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect operation to be executed as the current reach effect from a plurality of types including the effect operation that is the same as the effect operation executed last time. Selection data is set so that can be selected. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B based on the reach effect table designation buffer value in step S723 shown in FIG. Is specified and set in the use table, and the effect operation in the reach effect is selected and set from a plurality of types including the effect operation that is the same as the effect operation executed last time in step S724. Thus, when the variable display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state, unlike the case where the variable display result becomes “losing”, the same effect operation can be continued. It is possible to improve amusement interest by enabling an unexpected performance operation.

  In the reach effect pattern determination table 174, when the variable display result is “big hit”, a plurality of types of effect operations in reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 are executed according to the variation pattern. Selection data is set so that the user can select from the above. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect control CPU 101 sets the reach effect pattern determination table 174 as a use table in step S773 shown in FIG. 93, and sets the reach effect pattern determination table 174 in step S774. The reach production pattern is determined by referring to it. Thereafter, in response to the variable display result being “big hit”, the process proceeds to step S778 without executing the process in step S777. Thus, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect operation in the reach effect is selected and set from a plurality of types including the effect operation that is the same as the effect operation executed last time. Thus, when the variable display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state, unlike the case where the variable display result becomes “losing”, the same effect operation can be continued. It is possible to improve amusement interest by enabling an unexpected performance operation.

  In the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E and the specific effect pattern determination table 164F, the variation patterns are super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, In the case of any one of the super PB 4-3 and the super PB 5-3, the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” is selected from the effect operations associated with the reach effect executed according to the variation pattern. The data for selection is set so that the ratio of the production operation is higher than the ratio of the production operation in the specific production of the “main notice” from the production operations not associated with the reach production. In particular, when the variable display result is “losing”, an effect operation in the specific effect of “main notice” is selected from the effect operations associated with the reach effect, but not associated with the reach effect. From the effect operation, the effect operation in the specific effect of “main notice” is not selected. In this way, the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” is selected at a different rate depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state. As a result, the production effect in the reach production and the production operation in the specific production of the “main notice” can be related to enhance the production effect and improve the game entertainment.

  In the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E and the specific effect pattern determination table 164F, the variation pattern is any one of Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, and Super PB5-3. In some cases, the data for selection is selected so that the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” can be selected from the effect operations not associated with the reach effect executed according to the variation pattern. Is set. Thus, when the variable display result is “big hit”, from among a plurality of types including a presentation operation that is not associated with the type of reach presentation executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the production symbol has reached the reach state The production operation in the specific production of “main notice” is selected. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state, unlike the case where the variable display result is “lost”, the directing operation not associated with the type of reach effect is “ It can be executed as a specific effect of “main notice”, and an unexpected performance operation can be performed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 30A, the non-reach CA1-4 that executes a specific effect when the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, compared to when it is less than the predetermined number. The table data is configured such that the ratio determined for the variation pattern type is low. As a result, when the total number of pending storages exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to reduce the average fluctuation time of the special symbol and the production symbol, and to reduce the winning in which the starting condition is not satisfied.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 29A to 29C, depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation different from the design, and various production operations can be executed at a predetermined rate close to the design. Can be improved.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 25 (A) to 25 (F) and FIGS. 26 (A) to (C), The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined. This makes it possible to perform different types of performance operations according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 25A to 25F and FIGS. 26A to 26C, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the short-time state. The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined depending on whether or not the state is a certain variation state. Thereby, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, different types of performance operations can be executed, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In the first special symbol display 8a, a plurality of types of first special symbols and the first special symbol are obtained based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the first start condition is satisfied. A special game that variably displays the special symbol is executed. In the second special symbol display 8b, based on the fact that the second starting condition is established after the game ball is won in the second starting prize opening 14 and the second starting condition is established, A special game that variably displays the special symbol is executed. In the effect display device 9, for example, in the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, a plurality of variable displays in the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. Various types of performance symbols are variably displayed. Further, the CPU 56 included in the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 follows a program read from the ROM 54, for example, a game control timer interruption process shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process for controlling the progress is executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 101 mounted on the effect control board 80 follows the program read from the ROM and the like, for example, in the command analysis process in step S704 and the effect control process process in step S705 shown in FIG. The process for controlling the display state of is executed. Then, in the processing of steps S101A and S101B shown in FIG. 35, the variation pattern type of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol based on the establishment of the first start condition is determined, or the second A numerical value indicating a common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol based on the establishment of the start condition is determined. Using the data, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types.

  Thus, after the variation pattern type is determined using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result. By doing so, various rendering operations can be executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the rendering symbol has reached the reach state. On the other hand, even if the special symbol is variably displayed by a plurality of display devices such as the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the effect symbol is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display. Numerical data indicating a common random value MR3 is used for determining the pattern type. Thereby, in processing (for example, display random number update processing in step S17 shown in FIG. 5 and display random number value update processing in step S26 shown in FIG. 6) executed to update the numerical data indicating the random value MR3. The amount of processing can be reduced and the amount of programs can be reduced.

  When it is determined that the effect control CPU 101 is the variation pattern that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in the processing of steps S551 and S553 shown in FIG. 87, the specific effect pattern is set to the pseudo-continuous TP2 in step S555. In accordance with the symbol variation control pattern determined in step S518 of FIG. 85 in accordance with the determination to be any one of −1 to quasi-continuous TP2-3 or the temporary stop symbol determined in step S557, etc. Execute. In this way, based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, all of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. After the production symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the production symbol display areas, the production display that changes the production symbols again in all the production symbol display areas is performed a predetermined number of times. A specific performance can be executed. Then, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S98 shown in FIG. 35, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A set in step S100A for use in the determination in step S101B. ~ 135C, any of the variation pattern types classified by the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state after executing the specific effect of "pseudo-continuous" Table data is configured so that it can be determined. In this way, for example, it varies depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the reach state instead of the type of effect operation in the specific effect such as whether or not to execute the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” By determining the variation pattern type using the decision table that classifies the pattern type, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation unlike the design. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a large production operation at a predetermined rate close to the design.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state. Based on the fact that the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I that are set in step S92 for use in the determination in step S101B shown in FIG. For example, variation different from the case where the big hit type is other than “surprise” such as special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2. The table data is configured so as to include the pattern type. In this way, when the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is determined that the variation pattern type or the fluctuation pattern is different from that other than “surprise accuracy”. Despite being controlled in the round big hit state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by performing the same production operation as in the case of being controlled in the 15 round big hit state.

  Based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the CPU 56 changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the first state advantageous to the player in the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state. The winning action is executed. Then, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed by not changing the state of the probability change flag or the short time flag in the small hit end processing. Thereby, even when the normal state continues, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for being controlled to the probability variation state and improve the game entertainment.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 25 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 26 (B), and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. The table data is configured to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the game is controlled to the big hit state or the small hit game state depending on the variation pattern type, and the expectation for being controlled to the probable state is maintained. Can improve the game entertainment. In addition, when the variable display result is “small hit” and when the big hit type is “surprise”, it is possible to determine the common variation pattern type, so that the variable pattern can be determined Regardless of whether the display result is “small hit” or the big hit type is “surprise”, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced. .

  When the big hit type is “probable”, for example, the production control CPU 101 determines in step S508 or S509 shown in FIG. 86 whether the variation pattern is a plurality of types, and finally stops according to the determination result. An effect design to be a design is determined. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise”, various combinations of confirmed effect symbols can be stopped and displayed as a variable display result, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  The CPU 56 transmits a display result specifying command that can specify a variable display result and a variation pattern command that can specify a variation pattern from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80 (steps S102, S112, S114, and S115). , S117, S118). On the side of the effect control board 80, for example, the effect control CPU 101 executes the sub-notice effect setting process in step S516 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the production operation as a sub-notice production is one of a plurality of types. As an example, in step S593 shown in FIG. 91, a sub notice pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types using a sub notice pattern type determination table 170 as shown in FIG. 65. At this time, sub notice CY1 to sub notice CY3 are determined. If any of the sub-notice pattern types is determined, one of the sub-notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68 is set in step S595, and then the sub-notice pattern is set in step S596. Is determined as one of a plurality of types. Then, in response to the specific effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, the sub-notice pattern, etc., the symbol variation control pattern determined in step S518 shown in FIG. The effect symbol changing process is executed according to the notice effect control pattern. In this way, the CPU 56 or the like controls the progress of the game by the CPU 56 or the like on the main board 31 side by performing the determination, determination, or setting for executing the sub notice effect by the effect control CPU 101 or the like mounted on the effect control board 80. Therefore, it is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a variety of presentation operations as sub-notice effects while preventing an increase in control burden.

  In the sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 65, the table data is stored so that the sub-notice effect whose execution period overlaps with the specific effect is not executed, for example, when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed. It is configured. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a plurality of types of performance operations from overlapping, and to prevent a decrease in performance effects due to the player's interest being dispersed.

  In the sub-notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 65 and the sub-notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 66 to 67, the sub-notice effect can be executed even when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach”. Thus, the table data is configured. As a result, even if the variable display state of the effect symbol does not reach the reach state, the effect operation that becomes the sub-notice effect can be executed, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the reach state and improving the game entertainment be able to.

  In the sub-notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 68, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, the variable pattern display state of the effect symbol is a reach pattern. The ratio of executing the sub-notice effect is lower than when the sub-notice effect is executed, and the ratio of executing the sub-notice effect is a variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” and the specific pattern is not executed. The table data is configured to be high. As a result, it is possible to reduce the case where the variable display state of the effect symbol does not reach the reach state when the effect operation that becomes the sub-notice effect is executed, and the specific effect is not executed when the effect operation that becomes the sub-notice effect is executed. By further reducing the number of cases, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the player will reach a reach state when the sub-notice effect is performed, and to improve the gaming interest.

  The effect control CPU 101 checks the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 120 during the effect symbol variation processing, and responds to the fact that the operation detection signal is in the on state, and the notice effect control for sub-notice. An effect operation in the sub-notice effect is changed by switching patterns. Thereby, the sub notice effect according to operation by a player is attained, and a game interest can be improved.

  The effect control CPU 101 performs the processing of steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 85 based on the variable display result notified by the display result specifying command, the change pattern specified by the change pattern command, and the like in FIG. By executing the processing of steps S510, S512, and S513 shown, the finalized design symbol (and the production symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle of the fluctuation of the “pseudo-continuous (2-4 times)”) Each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the specific effect by executing the process of step S557 shown in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S576 shown in FIG. 90 to determine the effect pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the changing promotion effect. In this way, by determining the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas by the effect control CPU 101 mounted on the effect control board 80 and the like, It is possible to determine an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in a plurality of effect symbol display areas while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 56 or the like.

  The effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S557 shown in FIG. 87 when the “simulated ream” specific effect is executed, thereby combining the temporary stop symbols that become any one of the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8. To decide. Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 56 or the like on the main board 31 side.

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “slip” specific effect by executing the process of step S557 shown in FIG. . Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 56 or the like on the main board 31 side.

  In response to the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state, the effect control CPU 101 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A in the process of step S506 shown in FIG. The effect symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas other than the “medium” effect symbol display area to be stopped are displayed. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to determine the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. In addition, in response to the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol does not reach the reach state, the CPU 101 for effect control corresponds to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right appearance determination table in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. By determining an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed with reference to 161, the reach combination or jackpot combination is not achieved, and even if it is other than the reach combination or jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances shown in FIG. GC1 to GC8, development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 2B, random chances TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 2C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Determine the combination of finalized design symbols. Thereby, it can prevent giving a player a misunderstanding about whether a special effect is performed.

  When the CPU 101 for effect control is the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the promotion effect during the change, the determined effect symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the probability change jackpot combination in step S513 shown in FIG. 86 is displayed. decide. Then, in step S574 of FIG. 90, it is determined by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 59A whether or not the changing promotion effect is executed. At this time, when it is determined that the changing promotion effect is to be executed, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 64 in step S576, the effect symbol that constitutes the normal jackpot combination, The effect symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the promotion effect during the change is determined. Thus, even when the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the changing promotion effect is provided, a case where the changing promotion effect is executed and a case where the changing promotion effect is not executed are provided. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by enabling various performance operations while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines the final effect symbol that will be the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination in step S512 of FIG. 86 when it is the “third probability variation” jackpot type that executes the jackpot promotion effect. . As a result, it is difficult to recognize whether or not to be controlled to the probable change state from the variable display result of the effect symbol when the notification effect that the probable change state is entered after the control to the big hit gaming state is started. Thus, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification effect and improve the game entertainment.

  In the above embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards, such as two production control boards, may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 4). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured as follows.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is based on the fact that a variable display execution condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start area (for example, winning in the first start winning opening 13 or the second finger introduction winning opening 14). Variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b) that starts variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) that can identify each and derives and displays the display result, A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display means. In response, an effect display device (for example, an effect table) that starts variable display of the effect identification information (for example, an effect symbol) and derives and displays the display result of the effect identification information in accordance with the derivation display of the display result of the identification information. Device 9), a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous for a player who is likely to enter the starting ball into the starting area, and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is difficult for the player to enter or does not enter the game ball. ) And variable identification devices (for example, normal symbols) that can be distinguished from each other based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, passage of a game ball to the gate 32). ) Variable display and the normal identification information display means for deriving and displaying the display result (for example, the normal symbol display device 10), and the first display result (for example, winning symbol) being derived and displayed on the normal identification information display means. Based on the variable starter, the variable starter is controlled from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state. And the step of executing step S28 in the computer 560) and after the specific gaming state ends, the variable starting device shifts to an entry advantageous state (for example, a short time state) that is more likely to be the first state than the normal state. The entry advantageous state control means (for example, steps S139A to S139D, S159, and S164 in the game control microcomputer 560) that controls the entry advantageous state until the number of variable display of the identification information after the transition reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). A part for executing step S62 in the game control microcomputer 560, for example, and determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed. ) And a decision not to control to the specific gaming state by the pre-determining means. Reach determining means for determining whether or not the variable display state of the effect identification information is set to a predetermined reach state based on the result (for example, a part for executing steps S95 to S99 in the game control microcomputer 560); The variable display pattern type determining means for determining the variable display pattern type of the effect identification information to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result by the prior determination means and the determination result by the reach determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer) A portion for executing steps S101A to S101B in 560) and variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from among the variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determining means (for example, In the game control microcomputer 560 Steps S101C to S101E), and the variable display pattern type determining means is configured to provide a plurality of types according to the reach state in response to the reach determination means determining that the reach state is set. Variable display pattern type (for example, normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, CA2-3, CB2-1, CB2-2 variation pattern type, etc.) The variable display pattern determination means responds to the determination that the reach state is set to the reach state by the reach determination means after executing the process of S100A. The variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern type determining means Multiple types of reach variable display patterns included separately (for example, fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to PA2-4, super PA3-2 to PA3-8, PB3-1 to PB3-5, PC3-1 to PC3-4, etc.) (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation pattern type set in S101C), and the variable display pattern is the identification information A variation pattern of a re-variable display pattern (for example, “pseudo-continuous (2 to 4 times)” that resumes the variable display after temporarily stopping the production identification information from the start of the variable display to the display of the display result. : Refer to non-reach PD1-1 to PD1-6 in FIG. 9), and the number of executions of temporary stop of the production identification information and the production identification information in the approach advantageous state Information display means (for example, step S821H in the production control microcomputer 100) that displays information that can specify the total number of times (for example, the remaining number of times shown in FIG. 44 and the number of times of execution shown in FIG. 45). , S843G), and the information display means updates and displays information that can specify the total number of times based on the temporary stop of the effect identification information (for example, Y in step S843D). Step S843G is executed at this time, and information that can specify the total number of times is updated and displayed based on the fact that the effect identification information has been derived and displayed (for example, at the time of start of change of the effect symbol (effect symbol variation) Step S821H is executed in the start process (step S802)).

  The variable display pattern type determining unit responds to the determination that the reach state is not set to the reach state by the reach determination unit, and a plurality of types of variable display pattern types (for example, non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-1 to 9). CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to CC1-3 variation pattern types, etc.) (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S100A) After that, the variable display pattern determination means determines that the reach state is not set to the reach state, and the variable display pattern type determination means re-variably displays the variable display pattern type determination means. Variable display pattern types including patterns (for example, non-reach CB1-1, non-reach The variable display pattern is changed to a variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determination means (for example, a variable pattern type of CC1-1). , Non-reach PD1-1 to PD1-6 variation patterns) or non-reach variable display patterns (for example, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns). (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a variation pattern using a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation pattern type set in S101C). .

  An effect selection table (for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E or reach effect pattern determination) in which a plurality of types of effect operations performed during variable display of the identification information are set corresponding to the determination result of the variable display pattern determination means. The effect selection means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the processes of steps S701 to S705 as the main notice setting process of step S552) using the tables 172A, 172B, 173A, 173B) to select the effect operation to be executed this time. Part, a part for executing the processes of steps S711 to S715 as the reach effect setting process of step S517), and an effect executing means for executing the effect operation selected by the effect selecting means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the steps) Determined at S518 Based on the production control pattern, the production selection means includes the production selection table set so that the production operation selected this time is not selected the next time. Selection as an effect selection table used when selecting an effect operation (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects one of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E corresponding to the main notice table designation buffer value in step S713). After specifying the part that executes the process of step S715 or the reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B corresponding to the reach effect table designation buffer value in step S723, the process of step S725 is performed. Part to execute) It may be composed of sea urchin.

  In accordance with the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means, the effect selecting means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 for selecting the effect operation to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect operations performed during the variable display of the identification information. Is the part that executes the processes of steps S751 to S757 as the main notice setting process of step S552, and the part that executes the processes of steps S771 to S778 as the reach effect setting process of step S517) and the effect selected by the effect selecting means Production execution means (for example, a part for performing the processing of steps S835B, S835C, S847B, S847C based on the production control pattern determined by the production control microcomputer 100 in step S518) and production selection The means is the previously selected production action When the same effect operation is selected, an effect operation different from the previously selected effect operation is selected again (for example, the portion in which the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the processes of steps S755 and S756, and the processes of steps S776 and 777). It is also possible to configure such that

  Reservation storage means for storing variable display hold data that satisfies the variable display execution condition but does not satisfy the variable display start condition (for example, the first hold storage number buffer shown in FIG. 21B or the second hold) The variable display pattern type determining means has a hold in the hold storage means in response to a determination that the reach determination means does not enter the reach state. When the number of stored data (for example, the total number of pending storage) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”, “2”, “3,4”, “5-8”), the stored number is predetermined. The determination table (for example, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table) is set such that the ratio of determining the variable display pattern type including the re-variable display pattern is lower than when the number is less than the number. Using Le etc. 136A), it may be configured to determine a variable display pattern type.

  The variable display pattern type determining means corresponds to the determination that the reach state is set to the reach state, and the type of effect operation to be executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect identification information is the reach state. Determination tables (for example, reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C) for classifying variable display pattern types into a plurality of types according to (for example, normal reach production, reach production α1, α2, β1, “via roulette chance”, etc.) The variable display pattern type may be determined using the normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, CB2-1, CB2-2 variation pattern type, etc.).

  Based on the decision to control to the specific gaming state by the pre-determining means, the variable display mode of the identification information as the specific display result is changed to a plurality of types of specific variable display types (for example, a normal jackpot, the first certain variation) Specific variable display type determining means (for example, a part for executing steps S72 and S73 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining any one of the third probability variation, the sudden hit jackpot type, etc., and the variable display pattern type determining means Corresponds to the decision to control to the specific gaming state by the pre-decision means, and for the decision set to include different variable display pattern types according to the decision result by the specific variable display type decision means Variable display pattern using table (for example, big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I) (For example, after the game control microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S92, the process of steps S101A and 101B is executed to perform normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to CA3-8, CB3-1. To CB3-5, special CA4-1, CA4-2, CB4-1, CB4-2, CC4-1, or CC4-2 variation pattern type).

  In accordance with the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means, the effect selecting means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 for selecting the effect operation to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect operations performed during the variable display of the identification information. Is a part that executes the main notice setting process in step S552 and the reach effect setting process in step S517) and effect execution means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the effect operation selected by the effect selection means) in step S518. And the effect selection means is determined to be in the reach state by the reach determination means based on the effect control pattern determined in step S835B, S835C, S847B, and S847C. In response, execute based on the reach status A production operation is selected (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a process of steps S721 to S725 as a reach production setting process of step S517, or a part of execution of the processes of steps S771 to S778). May be.

  In accordance with the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means, the effect selecting means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 for selecting the effect operation to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect operations performed during the variable display of the identification information. Is a part that executes the main notice setting process in step S552 and the reach effect setting process in step S517) and effect execution means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the effect operation selected by the effect selection means) in step S518. Based on the effect control pattern determined in step S835B, S835C, S847B, and S847C), and the effect selection means is determined to control to the specific gaming state by the predetermination means. Based on that, it includes the same direction as the previously selected direction. An effect operation to be executed this time is selected from a plurality of types of effect operations (for example, the reach effect pattern determination table 172A corresponding to the fact that the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variable display result is “big hit” in step S723). And 172B may be configured to execute the processing of step S724 after setting one of them, or to execute the processing of step S778 based on the determination of Yes in step S775).

  In accordance with the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means, the effect selecting means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 for selecting the effect operation to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect operations performed during the variable display of the identification information. Is a part that executes the main notice setting process in step S552 and the reach effect setting process in step S517) and effect execution means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the effect operation selected by the effect selection means) in step S518. The step of performing steps S835B, S835C, S847B, and S847C) is performed based on the effect control pattern determined in step (1), and the effect selection means is different from the effect operation that is executed based on the reach state. Select an effect (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100 as the main notification setting process in step S552, and portions for performing the process of step S711～S715, such portion executes step S751～S757) it may be configured so.

  In accordance with the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means, the effect selecting means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 for selecting the effect operation to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect operations performed during the variable display of the identification information. Is a part that executes the main notice setting process in step S552 and the reach effect setting process in step S517) and effect execution means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the effect operation selected by the effect selection means) in step S518. Based on the effect control pattern determined in step S835B, S835C, S847B, and S847C), and the effect selection means is determined to control to the specific gaming state by the predetermination means. Or to reach reach by reach determination means Corresponding to the decision being made, a notice effect different from the effect operation executed based on the reach state at a different rate depending on the type of the effect operation executed based on the reach state being reached. Reach notice effect selection means for selecting from a plurality of types (for example, the variation pattern is Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super In the case of either PB4-3 or Super PB5-3, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the process of steps S711 to S715 as the main notice setting process of step S552, or the process of steps S751 to S757. May be included.

  The reach notice effect selecting means is in a reach state in response to the determination that the pre-determining means does not control to the specific game state and the reach determining means that the reach state is determined. The notice effect is selected from the effect operations associated with the type of effect operation to be executed based on the fact that the change pattern is one of super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, for example. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the processing of steps S711 to S715 and the portion of execution of steps S751 to S757 as the main notice setting processing in step S552), and is specified by the predetermining means. In response to the decision to control the game state, The notice effect is selected from a plurality of types including the effect operation that is not associated with the type of the effect operation to be executed based on (for example, the variation pattern is Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super In the case of either PB4-3 or Super PB5-3, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the process of steps S711 to S715 as the main notice setting process of step S552, or the process of steps S751 to S757. It is also possible to configure such that

  The information display means updates and displays information that can specify the total number of times based on the temporary stop of the production identification information, and displays the total number of times based on the derivation display of the production identification information. Since it is configured to update and display identifiable information, the entry advantageous state may continue even after the total number of identifiable information reaches a predetermined number of times, improving the fun of the game Can be realized. Further, in response to the determination that the variable display pattern type determining means determines the reach state, the variable display pattern type determining unit determines any one of a plurality of variable display pattern types according to the reach state, and determines the variable display pattern In response to the determination that the means is in the reach state, the variable display pattern is selected from the plurality of types of reach variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determination means. By being configured so as to be determined, it is possible to select various variable display patterns according to the reach state, and it is possible to realize further enhancement of the interest of the game.

  The variable display pattern type determining means determines one of a plurality of types of variable display pattern types according to the non-reach state in response to the determination that the reach determining means does not enter the reach state. Corresponding to the determination that the display pattern determining means is not in the reach state by the reach determining means, and the variable display pattern type determining means including the re-variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern type determining means. The variable display pattern is configured to determine one of a plurality of types of re-variable display patterns or non-reach variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determination unit, Using a common decision means (variable display pattern decision means) when reaching the reach state, Variable display pattern when not a can be determined, it is possible to reduce the program volume.

  The effect selecting means is configured to select an effect selection table set so that the effect operation selected this time is not selected as an effect selection table used when the next effect operation is selected. It is possible to prevent the game from being executed continuously, and to improve the fun of the game.

  When the effect selecting means selects the same effect operation as the previously selected effect operation, the same effect operation is continuously executed by re-selecting the effect operation different from the previously selected effect operation. Can be prevented and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In response to the determination that the variable display pattern type determination means is not in the reach state by the reach determination means, when the number of stored hold data in the hold storage means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the stored number is predetermined. The variable display pattern type is configured to be determined using a determination table that is set so that the ratio of the variable display pattern type including the re-variable display pattern is determined to be lower than when the number is less than the number. Thus, when the number of stored pending data is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the average variable display time of the identification information can be shortened, and the winning in which the execution condition is not satisfied can be reduced.

  The type of effect operation to be executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect identification information has reached the reach state in response to the determination that the variable display pattern type determination means has reached the reach state by the reach determination means. In response to the variable display state of the identification information having reached the reach state, the variable display pattern type is determined using the determination table for classifying the variable display pattern type into a plurality of types. Regarding the multiple types of performance operations to be performed, various types of performance operations are prevented in response to the fact that the variable information display state of the identification information has reached the reach state, preventing the rate at which each type of performance operation is performed from being extremely biased. It is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing the production operations at a predetermined rate.

  The variable display pattern type determining means includes different variable display pattern types according to the determination result by the specific variable display type determining means in response to the determination that the prior determination means controls to the specific gaming state. By using the determination table set to, the variable display pattern type is determined so that different presentations can be made according to the determination result of the specific variable display type, and the game entertainment can be improved. .

  In response to the fact that the reach selection means determines that the reach state is to be reached, the effect selection means is configured to select an effect operation to be executed based on the reach state. It is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by making a reach production.

  Based on the fact that the effect selection means has decided to control to the specific gaming state by the pre-decision means, the effect operation to be executed this time is selected from a plurality of effect operations including the same effect operation as the effect operation selected last time. By being configured to select, the game entertainment can be improved by enhancing the unexpectedness of the production.

  The effect selection means is configured to select a notice effect different from the effect operation to be executed based on the reach state, so that the game entertainment can be improved by causing various notice effects to appear. .

  In response to the fact that the effect selection means has decided to control to the specific gaming state by the prior decision means, or the reach decision means has made the decision to enter the reach state, the reach state has been reached. Reach time notice effect selection means for selecting from among a plurality of types of notice effects different from the effect actions to be executed based on having reached the reach state at a different rate depending on the kind of effect actions to be executed based on By being configured in this way, it is possible to improve the gaming interest by associating the reach state with the performance.

  The reach state in response to the determination that the advance notice selection means at the time of reaching is not controlled to the specific gaming state by the predetermining means, and that the reach determining means is determined to enter the reach state. In response to the decision to select the notice effect from the effect operations associated with the type of effect operation to be executed based on the fact that it was controlled, and to control to the specific gaming state by the predetermining means, By enhancing the unexpectedness of the production by being configured to select the announcement production from among multiple types including production operations that are not associated with the types of production operations to be executed based on the reach state. Amusement interest can be improved.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and is particularly suitable for a gaming machine having a plurality of variable display means, in which variable display is not executed simultaneously on these variable display means. Applied.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 1st special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball apparatus 9a 1st decoration design display 9b 2nd decoration Symbol display 20 Special variable winning ball device (big prize opening)
31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

After the game ball has won the first start area, the first identification information based on the first identification information that can be identified based on the fact that the first start condition that enables the start of the variable display based on the winning is established. First variation display means for starting the variation display of 1 and deriving and displaying the display result; and a second start condition that allows the variation display based on the winning to be started after the game ball has won the second starting area Second variation display means for starting the second variation display based on the second identification information that can be identified based on each of the identification information and deriving and displaying the display result. A gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the second variation display means,
Game control means for controlling the progress display of the game, and for controlling the change display in the first change display means and the second change display means,
Production control means for controlling production parts provided in the gaming machine,
The production component starts the fluctuation display of the production identification information in response to the start of the first or second fluctuation display, and derives and displays the display result of the first fluctuation display means or the second fluctuation display means. Including an effect display device for deriving and displaying the display result of the effect identification information according to
The game control means includes
The first variation by the first variation display means when the first start condition is satisfied on condition that neither the first variation display nor the second variation display is executed. First variation display start means for starting display;
When the second start condition is satisfied on the condition that neither the first fluctuation display nor the second fluctuation display is executed, the second fluctuation display by the second fluctuation display means is performed. Second variation display start means for starting display;
A first variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern including a variation display time from the start of variation display of the first variation display to the end of variation display in the first variation display means in which the first start condition is satisfied. For selecting a variation pattern including a variation display time from a variation display start time to a variation display end time of the second variation display in the second variation display means in which the second start condition is satisfied and the selection process. The second variation pattern selection process is executed by the same processing routine, and the variation display of the variation display in the variation display means in which the variation display start condition is satisfied among the first variation display means and the second variation display means. A variation pattern selecting means for selecting a variation pattern including time from a plurality of variation patterns;
Based on a variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means, first data indicating a variation display time of variation display executed in the first variation display means when the first start condition is satisfied; Fluctuation display time storage means for storing, in the same storage area, second data indicating the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display executed in the second fluctuation display means when the second start condition is satisfied;
A change display means specifying command capable of specifying which of the first change display means and the second change display means to start change display when starting the change display; and the change pattern selection means. A variation start command transmission means for transmitting a variation pattern command capable of specifying the selected variation pattern;
The effect control means includes the first change display means specified by the change display means specifying command in the effect display device based on the change display means specifying command transmitted by the change start time command transmitting means. Including an effect display control means for executing a change display of the effect identification information corresponding to the second change display means,
In the effect display device, the change display of the effect identification information is performed again after the special display result is temporarily stopped from the start of the change display of the effect identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A game machine characterized by including a re-variation pattern that causes a re-variation display to be executed a predetermined number of times.

Images